Commit | Line | Data |
---|---|---|
404fa7d6 DL |
1 | GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000 |
2 | Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | |
a933dad1 DL |
3 | See the end for copying conditions. |
4 | ||
5 | Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. | |
6 | For older news, see the file ONEWS. | |
7 | ||
8 | \f | |
251584f3 DL |
9 | * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
10 | ||
11 | ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using | |
12 | the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary. | |
13 | \f | |
a933dad1 DL |
14 | * Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
15 | ||
ffe36136 GM |
16 | ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains |
17 | the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo | |
18 | area or with tooltips. | |
19 | ||
559cee90 DL |
20 | ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to |
21 | read mail from the menu etc. | |
22 | ||
23 | ** Changes in Outline mode. | |
24 | ||
25 | There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command | |
26 | `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to | |
27 | the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents. | |
28 | ||
404fa7d6 DL |
29 | ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren |
30 | groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes). | |
31 | ||
8964fec7 SM |
32 | ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer |
33 | or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and | |
34 | several other special buffers. | |
35 | ||
39783d73 WP |
36 | ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse) |
37 | under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your | |
38 | .emacs file. | |
39 | ||
40 | The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount' | |
41 | determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled. | |
42 | ||
d35fce81 GM |
43 | ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows |
44 | abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing | |
45 | `directory-abbrev-alist'. | |
46 | ||
df5a1902 GM |
47 | ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs |
48 | is running in batch mode. For example, | |
49 | ||
50 | (message "%s" (read t)) | |
51 | ||
52 | will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result | |
53 | to standard output. | |
54 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
55 | ** Faces and frame parameters. |
56 | ||
57 | There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. | |
58 | Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
59 | `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face | |
60 | `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' | |
61 | sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise | |
62 | for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame | |
63 | parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. | |
64 | ||
65 | Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the | |
66 | `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters | |
79214ddf | 67 | `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the |
a933dad1 DL |
68 | `default' face and vice versa. |
69 | ||
f77a4a8a GM |
70 | ** New face `menu'. |
71 | ||
72 | The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus. | |
73 | Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported; | |
74 | attempts to set the font are ignored in this case. | |
75 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
76 | ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. |
77 | ||
78 | The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for | |
79 | colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma | |
80 | correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies | |
81 | the screen gamma of a frame's display. | |
82 | ||
83 | PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result | |
84 | in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD | |
85 | color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). | |
86 | ||
87 | The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class | |
88 | `ScreenGamma'. | |
89 | ||
90 | ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. | |
91 | ||
92 | The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. | |
93 | Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing | |
94 | oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height | |
95 | of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in | |
96 | the text. | |
97 | ||
98 | ** Emacs has a new face implementation. | |
99 | ||
100 | The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the | |
101 | font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, | |
102 | height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. | |
103 | These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together | |
104 | specify a font. | |
105 | ||
106 | Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. | |
107 | These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found | |
108 | under Lisp changes, below. | |
109 | ||
110 | ** New default font is Courier 12pt. | |
111 | ||
112 | ** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of | |
113 | its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise, | |
114 | it is hollow. | |
115 | ||
116 | ** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display | |
117 | truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The | |
118 | foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by | |
119 | customizing face `fringe'. | |
120 | ||
121 | ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You | |
122 | can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'. | |
123 | ||
124 | ** LessTif support. | |
125 | ||
126 | Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will | |
127 | need a version 0.88.1 or later. | |
128 | ||
129 | ** Toolkit scroll bars. | |
130 | ||
131 | Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for | |
132 | LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when | |
133 | configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll | |
134 | bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll | |
135 | bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring | |
136 | Emacs. | |
137 | ||
138 | When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how | |
139 | Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from | |
140 | Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your | |
141 | Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a | |
142 | define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take | |
143 | `s/freebsd.h' as an example. | |
144 | ||
145 | Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take | |
146 | a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the | |
147 | directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on | |
148 | different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your | |
149 | system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', | |
150 | add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. | |
151 | ||
152 | The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or | |
153 | `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. | |
154 | This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's | |
155 | image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since | |
156 | Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. | |
157 | ||
158 | ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. | |
159 | ||
160 | When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit | |
161 | widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for | |
162 | Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. | |
163 | ||
164 | ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. | |
165 | ||
166 | When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing | |
167 | whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is | |
168 | defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy | |
169 | highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not | |
170 | displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the | |
171 | whitespace. | |
172 | ||
173 | ** Busy-cursor. | |
174 | ||
175 | Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the | |
176 | display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. | |
177 | ||
178 | ** Blinking cursor | |
179 | ||
180 | M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on | |
181 | terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking | |
182 | and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in | |
183 | the group `cursor'. | |
184 | ||
185 | ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. | |
186 | ||
187 | This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is | |
188 | generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. | |
189 | See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more | |
190 | details. | |
191 | ||
192 | Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't | |
193 | have to do anything to activate it. | |
194 | ||
195 | ** Tabs and variable-width text. | |
196 | ||
197 | Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is | |
198 | defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is | |
199 | independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. | |
200 | Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. | |
201 | ||
202 | ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar | |
203 | ||
204 | *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". | |
205 | ||
206 | emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 | |
207 | ||
208 | The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the Motif | |
209 | one. | |
210 | ||
211 | *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, like in | |
212 | Motif. | |
213 | ||
214 | ** Hscrolling in C code. | |
215 | ||
216 | Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically. | |
217 | ||
218 | ** Tool bar support. | |
219 | ||
220 | Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details | |
221 | how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes. | |
222 | ||
223 | ** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
224 | ||
225 | Different parts of the mode line under X have been made | |
226 | mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode | |
227 | line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help | |
228 | about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or | |
229 | in the tooltip window if you have enabled one. | |
230 | ||
231 | Currently, the following actions have been defined: | |
232 | ||
233 | - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two | |
234 | buffers. | |
235 | ||
236 | - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and | |
237 | M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list. | |
238 | ||
239 | - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu. | |
240 | ||
559cee90 | 241 | - Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*') |
a933dad1 DL |
242 | toggles the read-only status. |
243 | ||
244 | - Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu. | |
245 | ||
246 | ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. | |
247 | ||
248 | When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name | |
e33b0397 | 249 | from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is |
a933dad1 DL |
250 | non-nil. |
251 | ||
252 | ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. | |
253 | ||
254 | Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. | |
255 | Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if | |
256 | the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and | |
257 | italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. | |
258 | Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face | |
259 | attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored. | |
260 | ||
261 | ** Sound support | |
262 | ||
263 | Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
264 | (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
265 | Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
266 | (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
267 | to enable sound support. | |
268 | ||
269 | ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives | |
270 | the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be | |
271 | forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this | |
272 | value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system | |
273 | users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, | |
274 | even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. | |
275 | ||
276 | The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. | |
277 | ||
278 | ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. | |
279 | ||
280 | As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be | |
281 | drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set | |
282 | `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. | |
283 | ||
284 | ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a | |
285 | bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi). | |
286 | ||
287 | This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | |
288 | `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this | |
289 | variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. | |
290 | ||
291 | ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. | |
292 | ||
293 | When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the | |
294 | value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a | |
295 | number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that | |
296 | fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. | |
297 | ||
298 | When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the | |
299 | value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a | |
300 | number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that | |
301 | fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. | |
302 | ||
303 | ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, | |
304 | notably at the end of lines. | |
305 | ||
306 | All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted | |
307 | spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. | |
308 | ||
309 | ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like | |
310 | query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated | |
311 | after each match to get the replacement text. | |
312 | ||
313 | ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. | |
314 | ||
315 | If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are | |
316 | longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is | |
317 | on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size | |
318 | by setting the following variable: | |
319 | ||
320 | - User option: max-mini-window-height | |
321 | ||
322 | Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a | |
323 | fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it | |
324 | specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize. | |
325 | ||
326 | Default is 0.25. | |
327 | ||
0d43b60d GM |
328 | ** Changes to hideshow.el |
329 | ||
330 | Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block | |
331 | selection and traversal and includes more isearch support. | |
332 | ||
333 | *** Generalized block selection and traversal | |
334 | ||
335 | A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps | |
336 | (both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying | |
337 | which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a | |
338 | `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts | |
339 | point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func' | |
340 | (which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp'). | |
341 | ||
342 | If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero, | |
343 | i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is | |
344 | backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see | |
345 | the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details. | |
346 | ||
347 | *** Isearch support for updating mode line | |
348 | ||
349 | During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden | |
350 | blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the | |
351 | line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden | |
352 | portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block | |
353 | is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil. | |
354 | ||
355 | To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include | |
356 | something like this in your .emacs. | |
357 | ||
358 | (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook | |
359 | (lambda () | |
360 | (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline))) | |
361 | ||
559cee90 DL |
362 | ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions |
363 | ||
364 | If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an | |
365 | entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making | |
366 | log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions. | |
367 | ||
368 | New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current | |
369 | buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary. | |
eb2aac9d GM |
370 | |
371 | Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries | |
372 | if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil. | |
373 | ||
374 | The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular | |
375 | expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be | |
376 | cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of | |
377 | a file. | |
378 | ||
3476b54a GM |
379 | ** Changes in Font Lock |
380 | ||
381 | *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove | |
382 | font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major | |
383 | mode. | |
384 | ||
b3b98592 GM |
385 | ** Comint (subshell) changes |
386 | ||
387 | Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes | |
388 | and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers. | |
389 | ||
390 | The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and | |
391 | buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current | |
392 | buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer. | |
393 | ||
394 | The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like | |
395 | M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of | |
396 | the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer. | |
397 | ||
e26cec67 GM |
398 | ** Changes to Rmail mode |
399 | ||
400 | RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg, like | |
401 | `j'. | |
402 | ||
400a1ed0 GM |
403 | ** Changes to TeX mode |
404 | ||
405 | The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to | |
406 | `latex-mode'. | |
407 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
408 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode |
409 | ||
410 | *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be | |
411 | created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. | |
412 | Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default | |
413 | macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically | |
414 | sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries | |
415 | can be edited from that buffer. | |
416 | ||
417 | *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several | |
418 | items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or | |
419 | `A' to use all marked entries). | |
420 | ||
421 | *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce | |
422 | memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. | |
423 | ||
424 | *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' | |
425 | in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order | |
426 | to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has | |
427 | been cited. | |
428 | ||
38de9631 GM |
429 | ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings. |
430 | The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading | |
431 | semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `(' | |
432 | in column 1 are always made leaves. | |
433 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
434 | ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) |
435 | has the following new features: | |
436 | ||
437 | *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern | |
438 | may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like | |
439 | to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable | |
440 | time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. | |
441 | ||
442 | *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This | |
443 | feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source | |
444 | file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the | |
445 | compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching | |
446 | pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it | |
447 | defaults to 1. | |
448 | ||
449 | ** Tooltips. | |
450 | ||
451 | Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current | |
452 | mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you | |
453 | can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'. | |
454 | ||
455 | Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, | |
456 | variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with | |
457 | the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the | |
458 | tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. | |
459 | ||
460 | ** Customize changes | |
461 | ||
462 | *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the | |
34f94cf9 DL |
463 | `State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will |
464 | cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs. | |
a933dad1 DL |
465 | |
466 | *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill | |
467 | Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the | |
468 | default). | |
469 | ||
0ae51efb GM |
470 | *** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies |
471 | between custom options. Example: | |
472 | ||
473 | (defcustom default-input-method nil | |
474 | "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string). | |
475 | This is the input method activated automatically by the command | |
476 | `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])." | |
477 | :group 'mule | |
478 | :type '(choice (const nil) string) | |
479 | :set-after '(current-language-environment)) | |
480 | ||
481 | This specifies that default-input-method should be set after | |
482 | current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears | |
483 | first in a custom-set-variables statement. | |
484 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
485 | ** New features in evaluation commands |
486 | ||
487 | The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp | |
488 | modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables | |
489 | print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the | |
490 | customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, | |
491 | eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. | |
492 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
493 | ** Dired changes |
494 | ||
495 | *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete | |
496 | command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default | |
497 | is, delete only empty directories. | |
498 | ||
499 | *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy | |
500 | command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not | |
501 | copy directories recursively. | |
502 | ||
f6737cde GM |
503 | *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?' |
504 | in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with | |
505 | the difference that the command will be run on each file individually. | |
506 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
507 | ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to |
508 | use the -f option when sending mail. | |
509 | ||
b1c609b1 GM |
510 | ** CC mode changes. |
511 | ||
512 | Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with | |
513 | current user setups (although it's believed that these | |
514 | incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances). | |
515 | However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled | |
516 | back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward | |
517 | compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this | |
518 | release. | |
519 | ||
520 | *** New initialization procedure for the style system. | |
521 | When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the | |
522 | variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now | |
523 | take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This | |
524 | is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific | |
525 | settings would override the global settings. This change makes it | |
526 | possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with | |
527 | Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file. | |
528 | ||
529 | By default, the global value of every style variable is the new | |
530 | special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from | |
531 | the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting | |
532 | of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described | |
533 | above. | |
534 | ||
535 | Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only* | |
536 | when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode | |
537 | function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a | |
538 | call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style --- | |
539 | then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style | |
540 | values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values | |
541 | only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the | |
542 | function documentation for more info. | |
543 | ||
544 | The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users, | |
545 | especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or | |
546 | with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is | |
547 | intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well, | |
548 | such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system | |
549 | is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current | |
550 | configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and | |
551 | global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set. | |
552 | ||
553 | (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.) | |
554 | ||
555 | **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable. | |
556 | This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior. | |
557 | ||
558 | This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style | |
559 | variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be | |
560 | completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when | |
561 | the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the | |
562 | empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the | |
563 | style system. | |
564 | ||
565 | **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior. | |
566 | In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set | |
567 | c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back | |
568 | as far as possible. | |
569 | ||
570 | *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling. | |
571 | CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the | |
572 | surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new | |
573 | chapter about this in the manual. | |
574 | ||
575 | **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations. | |
576 | The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly | |
577 | recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's | |
578 | primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and | |
579 | adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses. | |
580 | ||
581 | **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix. | |
582 | This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable | |
583 | c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings. | |
584 | ||
585 | **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode. | |
586 | This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments. | |
587 | ||
588 | It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC | |
589 | Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/). | |
590 | A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use | |
591 | inside CC Mode. | |
592 | ||
593 | Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that | |
594 | causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match | |
595 | the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is | |
596 | available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/ | |
597 | cc-mode/). | |
598 | ||
599 | **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling. | |
600 | The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in | |
601 | specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string | |
602 | literals. | |
603 | ||
604 | **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break. | |
605 | It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line | |
606 | prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If | |
607 | you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to | |
608 | this function. | |
609 | ||
610 | *** Fixes to IDL mode. | |
611 | It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant | |
612 | to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a | |
613 | struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword. | |
614 | Thanks to Eric Eide. | |
615 | ||
616 | *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style. | |
617 | It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when | |
618 | opening braces hangs and when they don't. | |
619 | ||
620 | **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block. | |
621 | ||
622 | *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block. | |
623 | See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a | |
624 | better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates, | |
625 | and is used by default to line up continued template arguments. | |
626 | ||
627 | *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the | |
628 | previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in | |
629 | the column specified by comment-column. | |
630 | ||
631 | *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments. | |
632 | In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation | |
633 | is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line | |
634 | prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that | |
635 | contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally | |
636 | don't want CC Mode to change the indentation. | |
637 | ||
638 | *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start | |
639 | instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup | |
640 | arguments. | |
641 | ||
642 | *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings. | |
643 | ||
644 | *** More preprocessor directive movement functions. | |
645 | c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional. | |
646 | c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are | |
647 | variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don | |
648 | Provan). | |
649 | ||
650 | *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations. | |
651 | ||
87be76f6 GM |
652 | ** Isearch changes |
653 | ||
654 | *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current | |
a933dad1 DL |
655 | selection into the search string rather than giving an error. |
656 | ||
87be76f6 GM |
657 | *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search. |
658 | ||
d35fce81 | 659 | Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable |
87be76f6 GM |
660 | `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current |
661 | search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as | |
662 | before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are | |
663 | highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to | |
664 | `secondary-selection'. | |
665 | ||
666 | The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor | |
667 | will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search. | |
668 | Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion | |
669 | using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its | |
670 | usual snappy response. | |
671 | ||
672 | If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for | |
673 | matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is | |
674 | set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x | |
675 | isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'. | |
676 | ||
677 | ||
d67f47e4 DL |
678 | ** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file |
679 | names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash | |
680 | sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.) | |
681 | ||
4b9347b3 GM |
682 | ** Shell script mode changes. |
683 | ||
684 | Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells | |
685 | derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and | |
686 | sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style. | |
687 | ||
79214ddf FP |
688 | ** Etags changes. |
689 | ||
690 | *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c. | |
691 | ||
aca0be23 | 692 | *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now |
8dc78b52 FP |
693 | possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with |
694 | {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out. | |
695 | This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains | |
696 | a regular expression. The manual contains details. | |
aca0be23 | 697 | |
79214ddf FP |
698 | *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function |
699 | declarations when given the --declarations option. | |
700 | ||
701 | *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form | |
aca0be23 | 702 | "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator. |
79214ddf FP |
703 | |
704 | *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and | |
705 | types. | |
706 | ||
707 | *** In Fortran, procedure is no more tagged. | |
708 | ||
709 | *** In Java, tags are created for "interface". | |
710 | ||
711 | *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs | |
712 | are now tagged. | |
713 | ||
714 | *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local | |
715 | variables are tagged. | |
716 | ||
717 | *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags. | |
718 | ||
8dc78b52 FP |
719 | *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is |
720 | for PSWrap. | |
79214ddf | 721 | |
f6737cde GM |
722 | ** Changes in etags.el |
723 | ||
724 | *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting | |
725 | the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions. | |
726 | ||
727 | If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE | |
728 | FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes | |
729 | TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist, | |
730 | obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used. | |
731 | ||
732 | TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH. | |
733 | ||
734 | FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags | |
735 | List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol. | |
736 | ||
737 | A useful example value for this variable might be something like: | |
738 | ||
739 | '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray) | |
740 | ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray) | |
741 | ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray)) | |
742 | ||
743 | *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance | |
744 | of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos. | |
745 | ||
746 | *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the | |
747 | names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer. | |
748 | ||
fbc164de PE |
749 | ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment |
750 | and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the | |
751 | LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup. | |
752 | ||
59c1bf85 DL |
753 | ** New language environments `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'. |
754 | These correspond respectively to the ISO character sets 8859-14 | |
755 | (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). There is | |
756 | currently no specific input method support for them. | |
757 | ||
e33b0397 DL |
758 | ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sqeuence-nos' to |
759 | remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now | |
760 | appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings. | |
761 | ||
762 | ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'. | |
763 | ||
6f8ea2ae DL |
764 | ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file. |
765 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
766 | ** New modes and packages |
767 | ||
99453a38 GM |
768 | *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x |
769 | align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions, | |
770 | determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for | |
771 | example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the | |
772 | equal signs of assignments. | |
773 | ||
559cee90 DL |
774 | *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting |
775 | paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'. | |
776 | ||
6448a6b3 GM |
777 | *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to |
778 | list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a | |
779 | buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to | |
780 | customize the package. | |
781 | ||
3476b54a GM |
782 | *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights |
783 | suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside | |
784 | expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of | |
785 | course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with | |
786 | reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode | |
787 | to be enabled. | |
788 | ||
8964fec7 SM |
789 | *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files |
790 | containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS. | |
791 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
792 | *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. |
793 | ||
794 | *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line. | |
795 | ||
796 | *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. | |
797 | ||
798 | *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object | |
799 | Pascal) language. | |
800 | ||
801 | *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on | |
802 | the text at point. | |
803 | ||
804 | *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. | |
805 | ||
8d54eb69 DL |
806 | *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures. |
807 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
808 | *** whitespace.el ??? |
809 | ||
ebcfda83 GM |
810 | *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript |
811 | files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including | |
812 | (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for | |
813 | interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and | |
814 | often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out / | |
815 | uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal | |
816 | codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu. | |
817 | ||
818 | *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle. | |
819 | ||
820 | Here is an example of columns: | |
821 | ||
822 | horse apple bus | |
823 | dog pineapple car EXTRA | |
824 | porcupine strawberry airplane | |
825 | ||
826 | Doing the following settings: | |
827 | ||
828 | (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ") | |
829 | (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]") | |
830 | (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ") | |
831 | (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t") | |
832 | ||
833 | ||
834 | Selecting the lines above and typing: | |
835 | ||
836 | M-x delimit-columns-region | |
837 | ||
838 | It results: | |
839 | ||
840 | [ horse , apple , bus , ] | |
841 | [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ] | |
842 | [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ] | |
843 | ||
844 | delim-col has the following options: | |
845 | ||
846 | delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted | |
847 | before all columns. | |
848 | ||
849 | delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted | |
850 | between each column. | |
851 | ||
852 | delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted | |
853 | after all columns. | |
854 | ||
855 | delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates | |
856 | each column. | |
857 | ||
858 | delim-col has the following commands: | |
859 | ||
860 | delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region. | |
861 | delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle. | |
862 | ||
f507826c GM |
863 | *** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that |
864 | were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu | |
865 | is displayed in the "Files" menu. | |
866 | ||
867 | The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions. | |
868 | ||
869 | To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode. | |
870 | ||
871 | To enable recentf at Emacs startup use | |
872 | M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET. | |
873 | ||
874 | To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use | |
875 | M-x customize-group RET recentf RET. | |
876 | ||
8062f458 DL |
877 | *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header |
878 | text. | |
879 | ||
36e24b82 | 880 | *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use |
91735437 DL |
881 | of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't |
882 | specific to Message mode. | |
883 | ||
36e24b82 DL |
884 | *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for |
885 | viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files | |
886 | with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'. | |
887 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
888 | ** Withdrawn packages |
889 | ||
890 | *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same | |
891 | functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. | |
25a81338 DL |
892 | |
893 | *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el. | |
a933dad1 DL |
894 | \f |
895 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) | |
896 | ||
897 | Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
898 | --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
899 | When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
900 | so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
901 | ||
7a85e4df GM |
902 | ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector |
903 | returned by function `recent-keys'. | |
904 | ||
559cee90 DL |
905 | ** New function `keyword-p' is an efficient type predicate for keyword |
906 | symbols. | |
907 | ||
404fa7d6 DL |
908 | ** Variables `beginning-of-defun' and `end-of-defun', can be used to |
909 | define handlers for the functions of the same names. Major modes can | |
910 | define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a etc. if the normal | |
911 | definitions of the functions are not appropriate for the mode. | |
912 | ||
8964fec7 SM |
913 | ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument |
914 | and is renamed `define-minor-mode'. | |
915 | ||
30a009a5 | 916 | ** If an abbrev has only a hook, and that hook has a non-nil |
ef961722 GM |
917 | `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook specifies |
918 | whether an expansion has been done or not. If it returns nil, no | |
919 | expansion has been performed. The character leading to the call of | |
920 | the hook will then be self-inserted. | |
921 | ||
81da8b32 GM |
922 | ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument. |
923 | In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray, | |
924 | and the function's value is nil if it is not found. | |
925 | ||
9e207b90 GM |
926 | ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms |
927 | with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a | |
928 | specified table. | |
929 | ||
930 | (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY) | |
931 | ||
932 | Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of | |
03d9c64c GM |
933 | TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the |
934 | saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is | |
935 | what BODY returns. | |
9e207b90 | 936 | |
8964fec7 SM |
937 | ** Regular expressions now support Perl's non-greedy *? +? and ?? |
938 | operators. | |
939 | ||
dde9e75a GM |
940 | ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been |
941 | removed since it wasn't used by anything. | |
942 | ||
9da30515 GM |
943 | ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required |
944 | instead of being optional. | |
945 | ||
d20679eb GM |
946 | ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to |
947 | modify read-only text. | |
948 | ||
fbc164de PE |
949 | ** New functions and variables for locales. |
950 | ||
951 | The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and | |
952 | decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and | |
b718982a PE |
953 | time functions like strftime. The new variables |
954 | `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system | |
955 | locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions. | |
fbc164de PE |
956 | |
957 | The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language | |
958 | environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from | |
959 | the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG | |
b718982a PE |
960 | environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need |
961 | not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables | |
962 | `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and | |
963 | `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions. | |
fbc164de | 964 | |
863476d1 SM |
965 | ** syntax tables now understand nested comments. |
966 | To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' | |
967 | modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment | |
968 | start sequences. | |
969 | ||
ef6d912c GM |
970 | ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p' |
971 | because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology. | |
972 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
973 | ** New function `propertize' |
974 | ||
975 | The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct | |
976 | strings with text properties. | |
977 | ||
978 | - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES | |
979 | ||
980 | Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified | |
981 | by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with | |
982 | PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the | |
983 | specified value of that property. Example: | |
984 | ||
985 | (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) | |
986 | ||
987 | +++ | |
988 | ** push and pop macros. | |
989 | ||
990 | A simple version of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp | |
991 | is now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols | |
992 | as the place that holds the list to be changed. | |
993 | ||
994 | (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. | |
995 | (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it | |
996 | (thus altering the value of LISTNAME). | |
997 | ||
998 | +++ | |
999 | ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such | |
1000 | as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. | |
1001 | ||
1002 | [:digit:] matches 0 through 9 | |
1003 | [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters | |
1004 | [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. | |
1005 | [:blank:] matches space and tab only | |
1006 | [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, | |
1007 | space, and DEL. | |
1008 | [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars | |
1009 | and DEL. | |
1010 | [:alnum:] matches letters and digits. | |
1011 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
1012 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
1013 | [:alpha:] matches letters. | |
1014 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
1015 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
1016 | [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. | |
1017 | [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. | |
1018 | [:lower:] matches anything lower-case. | |
1019 | [:punct:] matches punctuation. | |
1020 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
1021 | it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) | |
1022 | [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. | |
1023 | [:upper:] matches anything upper-case. | |
1024 | [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. | |
1025 | ||
1026 | +++ | |
1027 | ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. | |
1028 | ||
1029 | The following functions are defined for hash tables: | |
1030 | ||
1031 | - Function: make-hash-table ARGS | |
1032 | ||
1033 | The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments | |
1034 | are optional. The following arguments are defined: | |
1035 | ||
1036 | :test TEST | |
1037 | ||
1038 | TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. | |
1039 | Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, | |
1040 | it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. | |
1041 | ||
1042 | :size SIZE | |
1043 | ||
1044 | SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how | |
1045 | many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. | |
1046 | ||
1047 | :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE | |
1048 | ||
1049 | REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes | |
1050 | full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old | |
1051 | size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > | |
1052 | 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the | |
1053 | old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. | |
1054 | ||
1055 | :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD | |
1056 | ||
1057 | THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the | |
1058 | hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / | |
1059 | (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. | |
1060 | ||
1061 | :weakness WEAK | |
1062 | ||
1063 | WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t. | |
1064 | Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if | |
1065 | their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the | |
1066 | hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. | |
1067 | ||
1068 | - Function: makehash &optional TEST | |
1069 | ||
1070 | Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. | |
1071 | ||
1072 | - Function: hash-table-p TABLE | |
1073 | ||
1074 | Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. | |
1075 | ||
1076 | - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE | |
1077 | ||
1078 | Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and | |
1079 | values are shared. | |
1080 | ||
1081 | - Function: hash-table-count TABLE | |
1082 | ||
1083 | Returns the number of entries in TABLE. | |
1084 | ||
1085 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
1086 | ||
1087 | Returns the rehash size of TABLE. | |
1088 | ||
1089 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE | |
1090 | ||
1091 | Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. | |
1092 | ||
1093 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
1094 | ||
1095 | Returns the size of TABLE. | |
1096 | ||
1097 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE | |
1098 | ||
1099 | Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. | |
1100 | ||
1101 | - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE | |
1102 | ||
1103 | Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. | |
1104 | ||
1105 | - Function: clrhash TABLE | |
1106 | ||
1107 | Clear TABLE. | |
1108 | ||
1109 | - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT | |
1110 | ||
1111 | Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if | |
1112 | not found. | |
1113 | ||
79214ddf | 1114 | - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE |
a933dad1 DL |
1115 | |
1116 | Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with | |
1117 | another value, replace the old value with VALUE. | |
1118 | ||
1119 | - Function: remhash KEY TABLE | |
1120 | ||
1121 | Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. | |
1122 | ||
1123 | - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE | |
1124 | ||
1125 | Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two | |
1126 | arguments KEY and VALUE. | |
1127 | ||
1128 | - Function: sxhash OBJ | |
1129 | ||
1130 | Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. | |
1131 | ||
1132 | - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN | |
1133 | ||
1134 | Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as | |
1135 | a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for | |
79214ddf | 1136 | comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test |
a933dad1 DL |
1137 | and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' |
1138 | of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). | |
1139 | ||
1140 | TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. | |
1141 | ||
1142 | HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash | |
1143 | code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of | |
1144 | integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. | |
1145 | ||
1146 | Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to | |
1147 | be strings that are compared case-insensitively. | |
1148 | ||
1149 | (defun case-fold-string= (a b) | |
1150 | (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) | |
1151 | ||
1152 | (defun case-fold-string-hash (a) | |
1153 | (sxhash (upcase a))) | |
1154 | ||
79214ddf | 1155 | (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= |
a933dad1 DL |
1156 | 'case-fold-string-hash)) |
1157 | ||
1158 | (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) | |
1159 | ||
1160 | +++ | |
1161 | ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. | |
1162 | ||
1163 | It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent | |
1164 | circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents | |
1165 | a cons cell which is its own cdr. | |
1166 | ||
1167 | +++ | |
1168 | ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. | |
1169 | ||
1170 | If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs | |
1171 | #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. | |
1172 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
1173 | +++ |
1174 | ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or | |
1175 | t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the | |
1176 | specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it | |
1177 | is too short to reach that column. | |
1178 | ||
1179 | +++ | |
1180 | ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may | |
1181 | now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION | |
1182 | after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with | |
1183 | two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. | |
1184 | ||
1185 | If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, | |
1186 | perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily | |
1187 | and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. | |
1188 | ||
1189 | +++ | |
1190 | ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument | |
1191 | to specify which buffer to return the size of. | |
1192 | ||
1193 | +++ | |
1194 | ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook | |
1195 | calendar-move-hook after moving point. | |
1196 | ||
1197 | +++ | |
1198 | ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a | |
1199 | directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be | |
1200 | small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If | |
1201 | small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use | |
1202 | temporary-file-directory instead. | |
1203 | ||
1204 | +++ | |
1205 | ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all | |
1206 | the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects | |
1207 | `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as | |
1208 | hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. | |
1209 | ||
1210 | +++ | |
1211 | ** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the | |
1212 | elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car. | |
1213 | ||
1214 | +++ | |
1215 | ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. | |
1216 | ||
1217 | make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually | |
1218 | creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, | |
1219 | ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. | |
1220 | ||
1221 | +++ | |
1222 | ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' | |
1223 | ||
1224 | The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists | |
1225 | on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW | |
1226 | is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; | |
1227 | never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means | |
1228 | ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and | |
1229 | overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. | |
1230 | ||
1231 | If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', | |
1232 | that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call | |
1233 | to get an error if the file exists at that time. | |
1234 | The error reported is `file-already-exists'. | |
1235 | ||
1236 | +++ | |
1237 | ** Function `format' now handles text properties. | |
1238 | ||
1239 | Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. | |
1240 | If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties | |
1241 | ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the | |
1242 | result string. | |
1243 | ||
1244 | Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result | |
1245 | string where arguments appear in the result string. | |
1246 | ||
1247 | Example: | |
1248 | ||
1249 | (let ((s1 "hello, %s") | |
1250 | (s2 "world")) | |
1251 | (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) | |
1252 | (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) | |
b246b1f6 | 1253 | (format s1 s2)) |
a933dad1 DL |
1254 | |
1255 | results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. | |
1256 | ||
1257 | +++ | |
1258 | ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. | |
1259 | ||
1260 | Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. | |
1261 | The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic | |
1262 | argument in it. | |
1263 | ||
1264 | (let ((msg "hello, %s!") | |
1265 | (arg "world")) | |
1266 | (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) | |
1267 | (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) | |
1268 | (message msg arg)) | |
1269 | ||
1270 | +++ | |
1271 | ** Sound support | |
1272 | ||
1273 | Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
1274 | (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
1275 | ||
1276 | Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
1277 | (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
1278 | to enable sound support. | |
1279 | ||
1280 | Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a | |
1281 | list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined | |
1282 | when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The | |
1283 | functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the | |
1284 | sound to play, before playing the sound. | |
1285 | ||
1286 | The following sound properties are supported: | |
1287 | ||
1288 | - `:file FILE' | |
1289 | ||
1290 | FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be | |
1291 | searched relative to `data-directory'. | |
1292 | ||
6fb40beb GM |
1293 | - `:data DATA' |
1294 | ||
1295 | DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data | |
1296 | may be present, but not both. | |
1297 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
1298 | - `:volume VOLUME' |
1299 | ||
1300 | VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range | |
1301 | 0..1. This property is optional. | |
1302 | ||
1303 | Other properties are ignored. | |
1304 | ||
1305 | ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. | |
356673d4 DL |
1306 | |
1307 | ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being | |
1308 | a keyword symbol. | |
fc91dc2d GM |
1309 | |
1310 | ** Changes to garbage collection | |
1311 | ||
1312 | *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number | |
1313 | of live and free strings. | |
1314 | ||
1315 | *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of | |
1316 | strings that have been consed so far. | |
1317 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
1318 | \f |
1319 | * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 | |
1320 | ||
1321 | Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
1322 | --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
1323 | When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
1324 | so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
1325 | ||
1326 | ** New face implementation. | |
1327 | ||
1328 | Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD | |
1329 | font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. | |
1330 | ||
1331 | +++ | |
1332 | *** New faces. | |
1333 | ||
1334 | Each face can specify the following display attributes: | |
1335 | ||
1336 | 1. Font family or fontset alias name. | |
79214ddf | 1337 | |
a933dad1 DL |
1338 | 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set |
1339 | width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. | |
79214ddf | 1340 | |
a933dad1 | 1341 | 3. Font height in 1/10pt |
79214ddf | 1342 | |
a933dad1 | 1343 | 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. |
79214ddf | 1344 | |
a933dad1 | 1345 | 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. |
79214ddf | 1346 | |
a933dad1 | 1347 | 6. Foreground color. |
79214ddf | 1348 | |
a933dad1 DL |
1349 | 7. Background color. |
1350 | ||
1351 | 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. | |
1352 | ||
1353 | 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. | |
1354 | ||
1355 | 10. A background stipple, a bitmap. | |
1356 | ||
1357 | 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. | |
1358 | ||
1359 | 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what | |
1360 | color. | |
1361 | ||
1362 | 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its | |
1363 | color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. | |
1364 | ||
1365 | Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the | |
1366 | same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different | |
1367 | frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named | |
1368 | faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector | |
1369 | with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face | |
1370 | attributes mentioned above. | |
1371 | ||
1372 | There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face | |
1373 | definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly | |
1374 | created frames. | |
79214ddf | 1375 | |
a933dad1 DL |
1376 | A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified |
1377 | have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called | |
1378 | `fully-specified'. | |
1379 | ||
1380 | +++ | |
1381 | *** Face merging. | |
1382 | ||
1383 | The display style of a given character in the text is determined by | |
1384 | combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any | |
1385 | aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text | |
1386 | properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure | |
1387 | that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always | |
1388 | results in a fully-specified face. | |
1389 | ||
1390 | +++ | |
1391 | *** Face realization. | |
1392 | ||
1393 | After all face attributes for a character have been determined by | |
1394 | merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The | |
1395 | realization process maps face attributes to what is physically | |
1396 | available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized | |
1397 | face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face | |
1398 | cache of the frame on which it was realized. | |
1399 | ||
1400 | Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the | |
1401 | character to display because different fonts and encodings are used | |
1402 | for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different | |
1403 | charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. | |
1404 | ||
1405 | Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a | |
1406 | specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face | |
1407 | being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of | |
1408 | the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with | |
1409 | statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. | |
1410 | ||
1411 | In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function | |
1412 | `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > | |
1413 | 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from | |
1414 | the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is | |
1415 | initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for | |
1416 | Emacs. | |
1417 | ||
1418 | Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with | |
1419 | `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same | |
1420 | registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent | |
1421 | with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. | |
1422 | ||
1423 | ++++ | |
1424 | **** Clearing face caches. | |
1425 | ||
1426 | The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches | |
1427 | on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload | |
1428 | unused fonts. | |
1429 | ||
1430 | +++ | |
1431 | *** Font selection. | |
79214ddf | 1432 | |
a933dad1 DL |
1433 | Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a |
1434 | given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently | |
1435 | for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. | |
1436 | ||
1437 | If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a | |
1438 | pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font | |
1439 | family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a | |
1440 | property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to | |
1441 | an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. | |
1442 | ||
1443 | Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched | |
1444 | against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best | |
1445 | match for the given face attributes in this font list. | |
1446 | ||
1447 | Font selection can be influenced by the user. | |
1448 | ||
1449 | The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face | |
1450 | attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting | |
1451 | face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute | |
1452 | names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means | |
1453 | that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font | |
1454 | width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries | |
1455 | to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. | |
1456 | ||
1457 | Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to | |
1458 | specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a | |
1459 | face doesn't exist. | |
1460 | ||
1461 | +++ | |
1462 | **** Scalable fonts | |
1463 | ||
1464 | Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, | |
1465 | since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 | |
1466 | servers. | |
1467 | ||
1468 | To enable scalable font use, set the variable | |
b246b1f6 | 1469 | `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use |
a933dad1 DL |
1470 | scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. |
1471 | Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A | |
1472 | scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from | |
1473 | that list. Example: | |
1474 | ||
1475 | (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) | |
1476 | ||
1477 | allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. | |
1478 | ||
1479 | +++ | |
1480 | *** Functions and variables related to font selection. | |
1481 | ||
1482 | - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME | |
1483 | ||
1484 | Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY | |
1485 | is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a | |
1486 | string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. | |
1487 | ||
1488 | If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of | |
1489 | the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P | |
1490 | FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. | |
1491 | POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and | |
1492 | SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. | |
1493 | These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil | |
1494 | if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and | |
1495 | REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of | |
1496 | the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting | |
1497 | of the face font sort order. | |
1498 | ||
79214ddf | 1499 | - Function: x-font-family-list |
a933dad1 DL |
1500 | |
1501 | Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is | |
1502 | omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses | |
1503 | (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is | |
1504 | non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. | |
1505 | ||
1506 | - Variable: font-list-limit | |
1507 | ||
1508 | Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions | |
1509 | won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a | |
1510 | matching font. The default is currently 100. | |
1511 | ||
1512 | +++ | |
1513 | *** Setting face attributes. | |
1514 | ||
1515 | For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible | |
1516 | with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now | |
1517 | implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and | |
1518 | `face-attribute'. | |
1519 | ||
1520 | Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword | |
1521 | symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. | |
1522 | ||
1523 | The following attributes are recognized: | |
1524 | ||
1525 | `:family' | |
1526 | ||
1527 | VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', | |
1528 | or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' | |
1529 | and `?' are allowed. | |
1530 | ||
1531 | `:width' | |
1532 | ||
1533 | VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. | |
1534 | It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', | |
1535 | `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', | |
1536 | `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. | |
1537 | ||
1538 | `:height' | |
1539 | ||
1540 | VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in | |
1541 | 1/10 pt. | |
1542 | ||
1543 | `:weight' | |
1544 | ||
1545 | VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
1546 | symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', | |
1547 | `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. | |
1548 | ||
1549 | `:slant' | |
1550 | ||
1551 | VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
1552 | symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or | |
1553 | `reverse-oblique'. | |
1554 | ||
1555 | `:foreground', `:background' | |
1556 | ||
1557 | VALUE must be a color name, a string. | |
1558 | ||
1559 | `:underline' | |
1560 | ||
1561 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If | |
1562 | VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is | |
1563 | a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly | |
1564 | don't underline. | |
1565 | ||
1566 | `:overline' | |
1567 | ||
1568 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If | |
1569 | VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a | |
1570 | string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't | |
1571 | overline. | |
1572 | ||
1573 | `:strike-through' | |
1574 | ||
1575 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line | |
1576 | striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the | |
1577 | face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE | |
1578 | is nil, explicitly don't strike through. | |
1579 | ||
1580 | `:box' | |
1581 | ||
1582 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn | |
1583 | around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If | |
1584 | VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color | |
1585 | of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, | |
1586 | and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, | |
1587 | VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH | |
1588 | :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from | |
1589 | the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as | |
1590 | specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it | |
1591 | defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is | |
1592 | the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background | |
1593 | color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box | |
1594 | should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking | |
1595 | like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box | |
1596 | that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if | |
1597 | the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D | |
1598 | box. | |
1599 | ||
1600 | `:inverse-video' | |
1601 | ||
1602 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in | |
1603 | inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. | |
1604 | ||
1605 | `:stipple' | |
1606 | ||
1607 | If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. | |
1608 | The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are | |
1609 | searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH | |
1610 | HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA | |
1611 | is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means | |
1612 | explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. | |
1613 | ||
1614 | For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', | |
1615 | and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: | |
1616 | ||
1617 | `:font' | |
1618 | ||
1619 | Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid | |
1620 | XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font | |
1621 | is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous | |
1622 | versions of Emacs. | |
1623 | ||
1624 | For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can | |
1625 | be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE | |
1626 | must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." | |
1627 | ||
1628 | Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and | |
1629 | `defface'. | |
1630 | ||
1631 | *** Face attributes and X resources | |
1632 | ||
1633 | The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes | |
1634 | from X resources: | |
1635 | ||
1636 | Face attribute X resource class | |
1637 | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
1638 | :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily | |
1639 | :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth | |
1640 | :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight | |
1641 | :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight | |
1642 | :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant | |
1643 | foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground | |
1644 | :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground | |
1645 | :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline | |
1646 | :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough | |
1647 | :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox | |
1648 | :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline | |
1649 | :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse | |
1650 | :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple | |
79214ddf | 1651 | or attributeBackgroundPixmap |
a933dad1 DL |
1652 | Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap |
1653 | :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
1654 | :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold | |
1655 | :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic | |
1656 | :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
1657 | ||
1658 | +++ | |
1659 | *** Text property `face'. | |
1660 | ||
1661 | The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face | |
1662 | specification or a list of such specifications. Each face | |
1663 | specification can be | |
1664 | ||
1665 | 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. | |
1666 | ||
1667 | 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each | |
1668 | KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value | |
1669 | for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' | |
1670 | for face attribute names. | |
1671 | ||
1672 | 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or | |
1673 | (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is | |
1674 | for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. | |
1675 | ||
1676 | +++ | |
1677 | ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. | |
1678 | ||
acf3ecb7 EZ |
1679 | The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use |
1680 | on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on | |
1681 | the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by | |
a933dad1 | 1682 | default. You can get defined colors with a call to |
acf3ecb7 | 1683 | `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be |
a933dad1 DL |
1684 | used to clear the mapping table. |
1685 | ||
acf3ecb7 EZ |
1686 | ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type. |
1687 | ||
1688 | The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values', | |
1689 | and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose | |
1690 | type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style | |
1691 | color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame | |
1692 | display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the | |
1693 | old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and | |
1694 | `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for | |
1695 | compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs | |
1696 | should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to | |
1697 | modify their color-related behavior. | |
1698 | ||
1699 | The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for | |
1700 | any frame type. | |
1701 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
1702 | +++ |
1703 | ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. | |
a933dad1 | 1704 | |
463cac2d | 1705 | This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. |
a933dad1 DL |
1706 | |
1707 | The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the | |
1708 | end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. | |
1709 | Otherwise, it returns zero. | |
1710 | ||
463cac2d GM |
1711 | ** New `field' abstraction in buffers. |
1712 | ||
1713 | There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs | |
1714 | buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field' | |
1715 | text-property. | |
1716 | ||
9a9dfda8 | 1717 | Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence, |
463cac2d | 1718 | forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come |
9a9dfda8 | 1719 | to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will |
463cac2d | 1720 | not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement |
fc7ac24f GM |
1721 | commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field |
1722 | boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding | |
1723 | `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these | |
1724 | functions. | |
463cac2d GM |
1725 | |
1726 | Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in | |
9a9dfda8 | 1727 | a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common |
463cac2d | 1728 | editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt. |
a933dad1 | 1729 | |
9a9dfda8 GM |
1730 | The following functions are defined for operating on fields: |
1731 | ||
1732 | - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE | |
1733 | ||
1734 | Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS. | |
1735 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
1736 | If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the | |
1737 | constrained position if that is is different. | |
1738 | ||
1739 | If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable | |
1740 | positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument | |
1741 | ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is | |
1742 | constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property | |
1743 | as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE | |
1744 | is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent | |
1745 | fields. | |
1746 | ||
1747 | If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining | |
1748 | NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned | |
1749 | unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like | |
1750 | C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries | |
1751 | only in the case where they can still move to the right line. | |
1752 | ||
1753 | - Function: erase-field &optional POS | |
1754 | ||
1755 | Erases the field surrounding POS. | |
1756 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
1757 | If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. | |
1758 | ||
1759 | - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE | |
1760 | ||
1761 | Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS. | |
1762 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
1763 | If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. | |
1764 | If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an | |
1765 | field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned. | |
1766 | ||
1767 | - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE | |
1768 | ||
1769 | Return the end of the field surrounding POS. | |
1770 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
1771 | If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. | |
1772 | If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field, | |
1773 | then the end of the *following* field is returned. | |
1774 | ||
1775 | - Function: field-string &optional POS | |
1776 | ||
1777 | Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string. | |
1778 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
1779 | If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. | |
1780 | ||
1781 | - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS | |
1782 | ||
1783 | Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties. | |
1784 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
1785 | If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. | |
1786 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
1787 | +++ |
1788 | ** Image support. | |
1789 | ||
1790 | Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving | |
1791 | strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of | |
1792 | (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value | |
1793 | replaces the display of the characters having that property. | |
1794 | ||
1795 | If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of | |
1796 | `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If | |
1797 | AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a | |
1798 | window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal | |
1799 | area. | |
1800 | ||
1801 | IMAGE is an image specification. | |
1802 | ||
1803 | *** Image specifications | |
1804 | ||
1805 | Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS | |
1806 | is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each | |
1807 | specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a | |
35a5514b GM |
1808 | symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not |
1809 | described below are ignored. | |
a933dad1 DL |
1810 | |
1811 | The following is a list of properties all image types share. | |
1812 | ||
1813 | `:ascent ASCENT' | |
1814 | ||
1815 | ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, and specifies the percentage | |
1816 | of the image's height to use for its ascent. Default is 50. | |
1817 | ||
1818 | `:margin MARGIN' | |
1819 | ||
79214ddf | 1820 | MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as |
a933dad1 DL |
1821 | margin around the image. Default is 0. |
1822 | ||
1823 | `:relief RELIEF' | |
1824 | ||
1825 | RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief | |
1826 | around an image. | |
1827 | ||
1828 | `:algorithm ALGO' | |
1829 | ||
1830 | Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must | |
1831 | be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is | |
1832 | supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image | |
1833 | which is intended to display images "disabled." | |
1834 | ||
1835 | `:heuristic-mask BG' | |
1836 | ||
1837 | If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the | |
1838 | background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t, | |
1839 | determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4 | |
1840 | corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from | |
1841 | the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must | |
1842 | be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the | |
1843 | background of the image. | |
1844 | ||
1845 | `:file FILE' | |
1846 | ||
1847 | Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, | |
1848 | search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support | |
1849 | building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property | |
1850 | may be present in the image specification. | |
1851 | ||
518df5c4 GM |
1852 | `:data DATA' |
1853 | ||
1854 | Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet | |
1855 | supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be | |
1856 | present in an image specification, but not both. All image types | |
1857 | support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA. | |
1858 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
1859 | *** Supported image types |
1860 | ||
b246b1f6 | 1861 | **** XBM, image type `xbm'. |
a933dad1 DL |
1862 | |
1863 | XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image | |
1864 | properties supported are | |
1865 | ||
1866 | `:foreground FG' | |
1867 | ||
1868 | FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default | |
1869 | is the frame's foreground. | |
1870 | ||
1871 | `:background FG' | |
1872 | ||
1873 | BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is | |
1874 | the frame's background color. | |
1875 | ||
1876 | XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this | |
1877 | case, the image specification must contain the following properties | |
1878 | instead of a `:file' property. | |
1879 | ||
1880 | `:width WIDTH' | |
1881 | ||
1882 | WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. | |
1883 | ||
1884 | `:height HEIGHT' | |
1885 | ||
1886 | HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. | |
1887 | ||
1888 | `:data DATA' | |
1889 | ||
1890 | DATA must be either | |
1891 | ||
1892 | 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must | |
1893 | have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT | |
1894 | ||
1895 | 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT | |
1896 | ||
1897 | 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the | |
1898 | bitmap. | |
1899 | ||
1900 | **** XPM, image type `xpm' | |
1901 | ||
1902 | XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package | |
1903 | `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is | |
1904 | found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via | |
1905 | `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. | |
1906 | ||
1907 | Additional image properties supported are: | |
1908 | ||
1909 | `:color-symbols SYMBOLS' | |
1910 | ||
1911 | SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the | |
1912 | name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color | |
1913 | name. | |
1914 | ||
1915 | XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, | |
1916 | add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. | |
1917 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
1918 | The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able |
1919 | to display compressed images. | |
1920 | ||
1921 | **** PBM, image type `pbm' | |
1922 | ||
1923 | PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and | |
1924 | mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties | |
1925 | defined. | |
1926 | ||
1927 | **** JPEG, image type `jpeg' | |
1928 | ||
1929 | Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', | |
3bd37feb GM |
1930 | package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties |
1931 | are: | |
1932 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
1933 | **** TIFF, image type `tiff' |
1934 | ||
1935 | Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', | |
1936 | package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
1937 | properties defined. | |
1938 | ||
1939 | **** GIF, image type `gif' | |
1940 | ||
1941 | Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package | |
1942 | `libungif-4.1.0', or later. | |
1943 | ||
1944 | Additional image properties supported are: | |
1945 | ||
1946 | `:index INDEX' | |
1947 | ||
1948 | INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a | |
1949 | multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large. | |
1950 | ||
1951 | This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. | |
1952 | For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file | |
1953 | at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images | |
1954 | every 0.1 seconds. | |
1955 | ||
1956 | (defun show-anim (file max) | |
1957 | "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." | |
1958 | (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) | |
1959 | ||
1960 | (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) | |
1961 | (when (= idx max) | |
1962 | (setq idx 0)) | |
518df5c4 | 1963 | (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx))) |
a933dad1 DL |
1964 | (save-excursion |
1965 | (set-buffer buffer) | |
1966 | (goto-char (point-min)) | |
1967 | (unless first-time (delete-char 1)) | |
1968 | (insert-image img "x")) | |
1969 | (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) | |
1970 | ||
1971 | **** PNG, image type `png' | |
1972 | ||
1973 | Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', | |
1974 | package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
1975 | properties defined. | |
1976 | ||
1977 | **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. | |
1978 | ||
1979 | Additional image properties supported are: | |
1980 | ||
1981 | `:pt-width WIDTH' | |
1982 | ||
1983 | WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an | |
b246b1f6 | 1984 | integer. This is a required property. |
a933dad1 DL |
1985 | |
1986 | `:pt-height HEIGHT' | |
1987 | ||
1988 | HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT | |
b246b1f6 | 1989 | must be a integer. This is an required property. |
a933dad1 DL |
1990 | |
1991 | `:bounding-box BOX' | |
1992 | ||
1993 | BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of | |
1994 | the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS | |
1995 | files. This is an required property. | |
1996 | ||
1997 | Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See | |
1998 | lisp/gs.el. | |
1999 | ||
2000 | *** Lisp interface. | |
2001 | ||
79214ddf FP |
2002 | The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types |
2003 | which are supported in the current configuration. | |
a933dad1 DL |
2004 | |
2005 | Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when | |
2006 | they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. | |
2007 | The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache | |
2008 | manually. | |
2009 | ||
2010 | *** Simplified image API, image.el | |
2011 | ||
2012 | The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image | |
2013 | creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' | |
2014 | can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to | |
2015 | define an image based on available image types. The functions | |
2016 | `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a | |
2017 | buffer. | |
2018 | ||
2019 | +++ | |
2020 | ** Display margins. | |
2021 | ||
2022 | Windows can now have margins which are used for special text | |
2023 | and images. | |
2024 | ||
2025 | To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables | |
2026 | `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call | |
2027 | `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to | |
2028 | obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and | |
2029 | `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | |
2030 | the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | |
2031 | of the display margins. | |
2032 | ||
2033 | You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property | |
2034 | containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is | |
2035 | one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a | |
2036 | string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later | |
2037 | in this file). | |
2038 | ||
2039 | +++ | |
2040 | ** Help display | |
2041 | ||
2042 | Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse | |
2043 | moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property | |
2044 | `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line | |
2045 | that have a `help-echo' property. | |
2046 | ||
2047 | The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar | |
2048 | items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display. | |
2049 | If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is | |
2050 | evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the | |
2051 | tool-bar item is used. | |
2052 | ||
2053 | The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays | |
2054 | help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the | |
2055 | help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. | |
2056 | ||
2057 | +++ | |
2058 | ** Vertical fractional scrolling. | |
2059 | ||
2060 | The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. | |
2061 | This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. | |
2062 | ||
2063 | The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical | |
2064 | scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. | |
2065 | The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical | |
2066 | scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be | |
2067 | used. | |
2068 | ||
79214ddf FP |
2069 | (global-set-key [A-down] |
2070 | #'(lambda () | |
a933dad1 | 2071 | (interactive) |
79214ddf | 2072 | (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
a933dad1 | 2073 | (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) |
79214ddf | 2074 | (global-set-key [A-up] |
a933dad1 DL |
2075 | #'(lambda () |
2076 | (interactive) | |
79214ddf | 2077 | (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
a933dad1 DL |
2078 | (- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) |
2079 | ||
2080 | +++ | |
2081 | ** New hook `fontification-functions'. | |
2082 | ||
2083 | Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay | |
2084 | when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This | |
2085 | variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function | |
2086 | is called with one argument, POS. | |
2087 | ||
2088 | At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more | |
2089 | characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them | |
2090 | as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text | |
2091 | property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the | |
2092 | `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. | |
2093 | ||
2094 | +++ | |
2095 | ** Tool bar support. | |
2096 | ||
2097 | Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame | |
2098 | parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") | |
2099 | controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value | |
2100 | suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and | |
2101 | `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed | |
2102 | automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. | |
2103 | ||
2104 | *** Tool bar item definitions | |
2105 | ||
2106 | Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key | |
2107 | `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' | |
2108 | where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. | |
79214ddf | 2109 | |
a933dad1 DL |
2110 | CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is |
2111 | evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in | |
2112 | the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' | |
2113 | property (see below). | |
79214ddf | 2114 | |
a933dad1 DL |
2115 | BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as |
2116 | binding are currently ignored. | |
2117 | ||
2118 | The following properties are recognized: | |
2119 | ||
2120 | `:enable FORM'. | |
79214ddf | 2121 | |
a933dad1 DL |
2122 | FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled |
2123 | or disabled. | |
79214ddf | 2124 | |
a933dad1 | 2125 | `:visible FORM' |
79214ddf | 2126 | |
a933dad1 | 2127 | FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. |
79214ddf | 2128 | |
a933dad1 DL |
2129 | `:filter FUNCTION' |
2130 | ||
2131 | FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which | |
2132 | FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is | |
2133 | used instead of BINDING to display this item. | |
79214ddf | 2134 | |
a933dad1 DL |
2135 | `:button (TYPE SELECTED)' |
2136 | ||
2137 | TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated | |
2138 | and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. | |
79214ddf | 2139 | |
a933dad1 DL |
2140 | `:image IMAGES' |
2141 | ||
2142 | IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four | |
2143 | image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the | |
2144 | meaning of each of the four elements: | |
2145 | ||
2146 | Index Use when item is | |
2147 | ---------------------------------------- | |
2148 | 0 enabled and selected | |
2149 | 1 enabled and deselected | |
2150 | 2 disabled and selected | |
2151 | 3 disabled and deselected | |
79214ddf | 2152 | |
a933dad1 | 2153 | `:help HELP-STRING'. |
79214ddf | 2154 | |
a933dad1 DL |
2155 | Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help |
2156 | is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. | |
2157 | ||
2158 | *** Tool-bar-related variables. | |
2159 | ||
2160 | If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically | |
2161 | resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger | |
2162 | than 1/4 of the frame's size. | |
2163 | ||
79214ddf | 2164 | If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be |
a933dad1 DL |
2165 | raised when the mouse moves over them. |
2166 | ||
2167 | You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting | |
2168 | `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of | |
2169 | pixels. Default is 1. | |
2170 | ||
2171 | You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting | |
2172 | `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. | |
2173 | ||
2174 | *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. | |
2175 | ||
2176 | You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on | |
79214ddf | 2177 | a tool bar item. If |
a933dad1 DL |
2178 | |
2179 | (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] | |
2180 | '(menu-item "Shell" shell | |
2181 | :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) | |
2182 | ||
2183 | is the original tool bar item definition, then | |
2184 | ||
2185 | (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) | |
2186 | ||
2187 | makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same | |
2188 | item. | |
2189 | ||
2190 | ** Mode line changes. | |
2191 | ||
2192 | +++ | |
2193 | *** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
2194 | ||
2195 | The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there | |
2196 | that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display | |
2197 | a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. | |
2198 | ||
2199 | 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has | |
2200 | a `local-map' text property. | |
2201 | ||
2202 | 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and | |
2203 | that format specifier has a `local-map' property. | |
2204 | ||
2205 | 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM | |
2206 | is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a | |
2207 | `local-map' property. | |
2208 | ||
2209 | The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' | |
2210 | properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an | |
2211 | example. | |
2212 | ||
54522c9f GM |
2213 | *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is |
2214 | evaluated and the result is used as mode line element. | |
2215 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
2216 | +++ |
2217 | *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local | |
2218 | variable mode-line-format to nil. | |
2219 | ||
2220 | +++ | |
2221 | *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. | |
2222 | ||
2223 | This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable | |
2224 | `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are | |
2225 | completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and | |
2226 | `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top | |
2227 | line. | |
2228 | ||
2229 | The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face | |
2230 | `header-line'. | |
2231 | ||
2232 | The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a | |
2233 | position in the header-line. | |
2234 | ||
2235 | +++ | |
2236 | ** Text property `display' | |
2237 | ||
2238 | The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and | |
2239 | also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the | |
2240 | `display' property should be a display specification, as described | |
2241 | below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. | |
2242 | ||
2243 | *** Variable width and height spaces | |
2244 | ||
2245 | To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display | |
2246 | specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is | |
2247 | `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal | |
2248 | area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right | |
2249 | marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is | |
2250 | displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
2251 | simpler form STRETCH as property value. | |
2252 | ||
2253 | The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space | |
2254 | PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the | |
2255 | properties described below. | |
2256 | ||
2257 | The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the | |
2258 | characters having the `display' property. | |
2259 | ||
2260 | - :width WIDTH | |
2261 | ||
2262 | Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal | |
2263 | character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. | |
2264 | ||
2265 | - :relative-width FACTOR | |
2266 | ||
2267 | Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the | |
2268 | first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the | |
2269 | same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the | |
2270 | width of that character by FACTOR. | |
2271 | ||
2272 | - :align-to HPOS | |
2273 | ||
2274 | Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The | |
2275 | value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. | |
2276 | ||
2277 | Exactly one of the above properties should be used. | |
2278 | ||
2279 | - :height HEIGHT | |
2280 | ||
2281 | Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the | |
2282 | normal line height. | |
2283 | ||
2284 | - :relative-height FACTOR | |
2285 | ||
2286 | The height of the space is computed as the product of the height | |
2287 | of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. | |
2288 | ||
2289 | - :ascent ASCENT | |
2290 | ||
2291 | Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be | |
2292 | used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the | |
2293 | baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or | |
2294 | equal to 100. | |
2295 | ||
2296 | You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. | |
2297 | ||
2298 | *** Images | |
2299 | ||
2300 | A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION | |
2301 | . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, | |
2302 | in the display, the characters having this display specification in | |
2303 | their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', | |
2304 | the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is | |
2305 | `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal | |
2306 | area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in | |
2307 | the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE | |
2308 | as display specification. | |
2309 | ||
2310 | *** Other display properties | |
2311 | ||
2312 | - :space-width FACTOR | |
2313 | ||
2314 | Specifies that space characters in the text having that property | |
2315 | should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an | |
2316 | integer or float. | |
2317 | ||
2318 | - :height HEIGHT | |
2319 | ||
2320 | Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. | |
2321 | ||
2322 | If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that | |
2323 | means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of | |
2324 | the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A | |
2325 | ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which | |
2326 | a font is available counts as a step. | |
2327 | ||
2328 | If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times | |
2329 | as tall as the frame's default font. | |
2330 | ||
2331 | If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current | |
2332 | height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. | |
2333 | ||
2334 | Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol | |
2335 | `height' bound to the current specified font height. | |
2336 | ||
2337 | - :raise FACTOR | |
2338 | ||
2339 | FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current | |
2340 | font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters | |
2341 | raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The | |
2342 | amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the | |
2343 | `:height' subproperty. | |
2344 | ||
2345 | *** Conditional display properties | |
2346 | ||
2347 | All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification | |
2348 | has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC | |
2349 | applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. | |
2350 | During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of | |
2351 | the text having the `display' property. | |
2352 | ||
2353 | The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to | |
2354 | `(:when t SPEC)'. | |
2355 | ||
2356 | +++ | |
2357 | ** New menu separator types. | |
2358 | ||
2359 | Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with | |
2360 | item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are | |
2361 | treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used | |
2362 | to specify other menu separator types. | |
2363 | ||
2364 | - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' | |
2365 | ||
2366 | No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the | |
2367 | separator occurs. | |
2368 | ||
2369 | - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' | |
2370 | ||
2371 | A single line in the menu's foreground color. | |
2372 | ||
2373 | - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' | |
2374 | ||
2375 | A double line in the menu's foreground color. | |
2376 | ||
2377 | - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' | |
2378 | ||
2379 | A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
2380 | ||
2381 | - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' | |
2382 | ||
2383 | A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
2384 | ||
2385 | - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' | |
2386 | ||
2387 | A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form | |
2388 | displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. | |
2389 | ||
2390 | - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' | |
2391 | ||
2392 | A single line with 3D raised appearance. | |
2393 | ||
2394 | - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' | |
2395 | ||
2396 | A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. | |
2397 | ||
2398 | - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' | |
2399 | ||
2400 | A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. | |
2401 | ||
2402 | - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' | |
2403 | ||
2404 | Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
2405 | ||
2406 | - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' | |
2407 | ||
2408 | Two lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
2409 | ||
2410 | - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' | |
2411 | ||
2412 | Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
2413 | ||
2414 | - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' | |
2415 | ||
2416 | Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
2417 | ||
2418 | Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like | |
2419 | the corresponding single-line separators. | |
2420 | ||
2421 | +++ | |
2422 | ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. | |
2423 | ||
2424 | The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
2425 | `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. | |
2426 | Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify | |
2427 | that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, | |
2428 | default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the | |
2429 | default background is the background color of the frame, and the | |
2430 | default foreground is black. | |
2431 | ||
2432 | The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' | |
2433 | (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class | |
2434 | `ScrollBarBackground'). | |
2435 | ||
2436 | Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource | |
2437 | settings for scroll bar colors. | |
2438 | ||
2439 | +++ | |
2440 | ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent | |
2441 | display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. | |
2442 | ||
2443 | --- | |
2444 | ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it | |
2445 | starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based | |
2446 | on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued | |
2447 | line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from | |
2448 | the original window start. | |
2449 | ||
2450 | --- | |
2451 | ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions | |
2452 | `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed | |
2453 | now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. | |
2454 | ||
2455 | +++ | |
2456 | ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. | |
2457 | ||
2458 | A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable | |
2459 | `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes | |
2460 | windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any | |
2461 | other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
2462 | ||
2463 | The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer | |
2464 | fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
2465 | ||
2466 | (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) | |
2467 | ||
2468 | A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is | |
2469 | fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the | |
2470 | window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To | |
2471 | change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' | |
2472 | temporarily to nil, for example | |
2473 | ||
2474 | (let ((window-size-fixed nil)) | |
2475 | (enlarge-window 10)) | |
2476 | ||
79214ddf | 2477 | Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, |
a933dad1 | 2478 | or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. |
e33b0397 DL |
2479 | ^L |
2480 | * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. | |
2481 | ||
2482 | ** Not new, but not mentioned before: | |
2483 | M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark. | |
a933dad1 DL |
2484 | \f |
2485 | * Changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
2486 | ||
2487 | ** Init file may be called .emacs.el. | |
2488 | ||
2489 | You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. | |
2490 | Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name | |
2491 | `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. | |
2492 | ||
2493 | If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file | |
2494 | is the one that is used. | |
2495 | ||
2496 | ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return | |
2497 | the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). | |
2498 | Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, | |
2499 | separate from the command's regular output. | |
2500 | Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer | |
2501 | says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. | |
2502 | In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies | |
2503 | the buffer name. | |
2504 | ||
2505 | When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error | |
2506 | output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate | |
2507 | it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not | |
2508 | cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. | |
2509 | ||
2510 | ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in | |
2511 | the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, | |
2512 | is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers | |
2513 | created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. | |
2514 | ||
2515 | ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For | |
2516 | example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names | |
2517 | match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the | |
2518 | quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. | |
2519 | ||
2520 | ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches | |
2521 | now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: | |
2522 | if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then | |
2523 | they never ignore case. | |
2524 | ||
2525 | ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned | |
2526 | under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually | |
2527 | applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents | |
2528 | of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or | |
2529 | just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs | |
2530 | convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a | |
2531 | part of the general feature of coding system conversion. | |
2532 | ||
2533 | If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to | |
2534 | the same format that was used in the file before. | |
2535 | ||
2536 | You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable | |
2537 | `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. | |
2538 | ||
2539 | ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been | |
2540 | renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. | |
2541 | This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. | |
2542 | ||
2543 | ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. | |
2544 | The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a | |
2545 | buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for | |
2546 | your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format | |
2547 | is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual | |
2548 | end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for | |
2549 | Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). | |
2550 | ||
2551 | The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, | |
2552 | eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, | |
2553 | control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line | |
2554 | format. You can now customize these variables. | |
2555 | ||
2556 | ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a | |
2557 | filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a | |
2558 | filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of | |
2559 | enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. | |
2560 | ||
2561 | ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode | |
2562 | in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given | |
2563 | windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. | |
2564 | ||
2565 | ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function | |
2566 | dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file | |
2567 | doesn't have any effect. | |
2568 | ||
2569 | ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, | |
2570 | not one per buffer. | |
2571 | ||
2572 | ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to | |
2573 | use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: | |
2574 | (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) | |
2575 | ||
2576 | ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. | |
2577 | To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the | |
2578 | `auto-show-mode' command. | |
2579 | ||
2580 | ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to | |
2581 | avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous | |
2582 | versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font | |
2583 | choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change | |
2584 | occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. | |
2585 | ||
2586 | ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's | |
2587 | cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. | |
2588 | ||
2589 | ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the | |
2590 | character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this | |
2591 | feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. | |
2592 | ||
2593 | ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at | |
2594 | the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an | |
2595 | interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode | |
2596 | and variable specification, as well as on the first line. | |
2597 | ||
2598 | ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. | |
2599 | ||
2600 | The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system | |
2601 | that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and | |
2602 | one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that | |
2603 | codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character | |
2604 | set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. | |
2605 | ||
2606 | Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates | |
2607 | from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. | |
2608 | ||
2609 | IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have | |
2610 | equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to | |
2611 | a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to | |
2612 | `?' on other systems. | |
2613 | ||
2614 | IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this | |
2615 | feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on | |
2616 | Unix. | |
2617 | ||
2618 | Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the | |
2619 | current codepage when it starts. | |
2620 | ||
2621 | ** Mail changes | |
2622 | ||
2623 | *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the | |
2624 | default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than | |
2625 | default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than | |
2626 | sendmail-coding-system and the local value of | |
2627 | buffer-file-coding-system. | |
2628 | ||
2629 | You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set | |
2630 | sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing | |
2631 | mail. | |
2632 | ||
2633 | *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, | |
2634 | if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, | |
2635 | Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a | |
2636 | list of possible coding systems. | |
2637 | ||
2638 | ** CC Mode changes | |
2639 | ||
2640 | *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major | |
2641 | modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no | |
2642 | longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's | |
2643 | docstring for details. | |
2644 | ||
2645 | *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic | |
2646 | symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is | |
2647 | found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a | |
2648 | prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied | |
2649 | lineup functions use this feature currently. | |
2650 | ||
2651 | *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and | |
2652 | "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. | |
2653 | ||
2654 | *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for | |
2655 | "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. | |
2656 | ||
2657 | *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately | |
2658 | from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new | |
2659 | symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on | |
2660 | c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for | |
2661 | anonymous classes. | |
2662 | ||
2663 | *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific | |
2664 | syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont | |
2665 | ||
2666 | *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol | |
2667 | inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike | |
2668 | support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup | |
2669 | function c-lineup-inexpr-block. | |
2670 | ||
2671 | *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists | |
2672 | (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open | |
2673 | brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. | |
2674 | c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces | |
2675 | (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). | |
2676 | ||
2677 | *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. | |
2678 | ||
2679 | *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. | |
2680 | ||
2681 | *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) | |
2682 | for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. | |
2683 | ||
2684 | *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. | |
2685 | ||
2686 | *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation | |
2687 | associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. | |
2688 | This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some | |
2689 | circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the | |
2690 | class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). | |
2691 | ||
2692 | ** Gnus changes. | |
2693 | ||
2694 | *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been | |
2695 | added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the | |
2696 | Gnus manual for the full story. | |
2697 | ||
2698 | *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than | |
2699 | before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft | |
2700 | group, which is created automatically. | |
2701 | ||
2702 | *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header | |
2703 | values. | |
2704 | ||
2705 | *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. | |
2706 | ||
2707 | *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message | |
2708 | outside the region: `C-c C-v'. | |
2709 | ||
2710 | *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with | |
2711 | `C-u C-c C-c'. | |
2712 | ||
2713 | *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. | |
2714 | ||
2715 | *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit | |
2716 | re-highlighting of the article buffer. | |
2717 | ||
2718 | *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. | |
2719 | ||
2720 | *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic | |
2721 | Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. | |
2722 | ||
2723 | *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix | |
2724 | `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. | |
2725 | ||
2726 | *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater | |
2727 | control over simplification. | |
2728 | ||
2729 | *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. | |
2730 | ||
2731 | *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the | |
2732 | limit. | |
2733 | ||
2734 | *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. | |
2735 | ||
2736 | *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. | |
2737 | ||
79214ddf | 2738 | *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. |
a933dad1 DL |
2739 | If you used this function in your initialization files, you must |
2740 | rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. | |
2741 | ||
2742 | *** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix | |
2743 | `a' forces normal posting method. | |
2744 | ||
2745 | *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text | |
2746 | -- `W d'. | |
2747 | ||
2748 | *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' | |
2749 | to a non-nil value. | |
2750 | ||
2751 | *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling | |
2752 | where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. | |
2753 | ||
2754 | *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer | |
2755 | has been added. | |
2756 | ||
2757 | *** A history of where mails have been split is available. | |
2758 | ||
2759 | *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. | |
2760 | ||
2761 | *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting | |
2762 | `gnus-score-thread-simplify'. | |
2763 | ||
2764 | *** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- | |
2765 | `message-cite-original-without-signature'. | |
2766 | ||
2767 | *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. | |
2768 | ||
2769 | *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has | |
2770 | been added. | |
2771 | ||
2772 | *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the | |
2773 | `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. | |
2774 | ||
2775 | *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually | |
2776 | updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. | |
2777 | ||
2778 | *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. | |
2779 | ||
2780 | *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. | |
2781 | ||
2782 | *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. | |
2783 | ||
2784 | ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode | |
2785 | ||
2786 | *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give | |
2787 | options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in | |
2788 | nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". | |
2789 | ||
2790 | *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a | |
2791 | TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some | |
2792 | of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run | |
2793 | TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you | |
2794 | can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. | |
2795 | ||
2796 | *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. | |
2797 | All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available | |
2798 | but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use | |
2799 | the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. | |
2800 | ||
2801 | *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check | |
2802 | the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* | |
2803 | buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular | |
2804 | mismatch. | |
2805 | ||
2806 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
2807 | ||
2808 | *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and | |
2809 | file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. | |
2810 | ||
2811 | *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now | |
2812 | lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 | |
2813 | characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be | |
2814 | removed from the label. | |
2815 | ||
2816 | *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use | |
2817 | a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. | |
2818 | ||
2819 | *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the | |
2820 | customization group `reftex-finding-files'. | |
2821 | ||
2822 | *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to | |
2823 | `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular | |
79214ddf | 2824 | expressions. |
a933dad1 DL |
2825 | |
2826 | *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. | |
2827 | ||
2828 | ** New/deleted modes and packages | |
2829 | ||
2830 | *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and | |
2831 | SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
2832 | ||
2833 | *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for | |
2834 | editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with | |
2835 | SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
2836 | ||
2837 | *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer | |
2838 | changes with a special face. | |
2839 | ||
2840 | *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and | |
2841 | this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use | |
2842 | Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. | |
2843 | \f | |
2844 | * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
2845 | ||
2846 | ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. | |
2847 | This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, | |
2848 | conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, | |
2849 | and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, | |
2850 | check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. | |
2851 | ||
2852 | The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds | |
2853 | Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim | |
2854 | distribution when the config.bat script is run. | |
2855 | ||
2856 | ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on | |
2857 | MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it | |
2858 | controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written | |
2859 | directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of | |
2860 | Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing | |
2861 | on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a | |
2862 | string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external | |
2863 | program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of | |
2864 | printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) | |
2865 | ||
2866 | ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript | |
2867 | output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs | |
2868 | available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard | |
2869 | input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a | |
2870 | temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external | |
2871 | program. | |
2872 | ||
2873 | An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, | |
2874 | and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these | |
2875 | programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax | |
2876 | automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name | |
2877 | as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is | |
2878 | ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. | |
2879 | ||
2880 | ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has | |
2881 | a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on | |
2882 | MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but | |
2883 | was not documented clearly before. | |
2884 | ||
2885 | ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. | |
2886 | This includes Tetris and Snake. | |
2887 | \f | |
2888 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
2889 | ||
2890 | ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position | |
2891 | return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. | |
2892 | They both accept an optional argument, which has the same | |
2893 | meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. | |
2894 | ||
2895 | ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument | |
2896 | WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, | |
2897 | and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. | |
2898 | ||
2899 | ** Changes in the file-attributes function. | |
2900 | ||
2901 | *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. | |
2902 | It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. | |
2903 | ||
2904 | *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
2905 | the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two | |
2906 | integers. | |
2907 | ||
2908 | ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of | |
2909 | files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same | |
2910 | arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that | |
2911 | file names and attributes are returned. | |
2912 | ||
2913 | ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for | |
2914 | sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It | |
2915 | accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes. | |
2916 | It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and | |
2917 | returns the result. | |
2918 | ||
2919 | ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern | |
2920 | to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. | |
2921 | ||
2922 | ** New functions for base64 conversion: | |
2923 | ||
2924 | The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer | |
2925 | into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region | |
2926 | performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported | |
2927 | optionally. | |
2928 | ||
2929 | Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar | |
2930 | job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. | |
2931 | ||
2932 | ** | |
2933 | The new function process-running-child-p | |
2934 | will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its | |
2935 | terminal to its own child process. | |
2936 | ||
2937 | ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: | |
2938 | when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal | |
2939 | to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell | |
2940 | itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. | |
2941 | ||
2942 | ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can | |
2943 | be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. | |
2944 | ||
2945 | ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. | |
2946 | :included is an alias for :visible. | |
2947 | ||
2948 | easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by | |
2949 | easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used | |
2950 | to move or copy menu entries. | |
2951 | ||
2952 | ** Multibyte editing changes | |
2953 | ||
2954 | *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is | |
2955 | an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to | |
2956 | make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also | |
2957 | work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and | |
2958 | char-bytes in a loop typically as below: | |
2959 | (setq char (sref str idx) | |
2960 | idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) | |
2961 | The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. | |
2962 | ||
2963 | If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character | |
2964 | (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: | |
2965 | (charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) | |
2966 | ||
2967 | *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the | |
2968 | region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or | |
2969 | deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: | |
2970 | ||
2971 | Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted | |
2972 | ||
2973 | This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character | |
2974 | across the boundary. | |
2975 | ||
2976 | *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include | |
2977 | `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: | |
2978 | o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and | |
2979 | contains 8-bit characters. | |
2980 | o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and | |
2981 | contains invalid characters. | |
2982 | ||
2983 | *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove | |
2984 | text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly | |
2985 | preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing | |
2986 | text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct | |
2987 | way. | |
2988 | ||
2989 | *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. | |
2990 | If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of | |
2991 | end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by | |
2992 | prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. | |
2993 | ||
2994 | *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly | |
2995 | compose Thai characters in a string. | |
2996 | ||
2997 | ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third | |
2998 | argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name | |
2999 | for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as | |
3000 | menus should always use the third argument. | |
3001 | ||
3002 | ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, | |
3003 | read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second | |
3004 | arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current | |
3005 | input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. | |
3006 | ||
3007 | ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents | |
3008 | of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in | |
3009 | programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing | |
3010 | inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. | |
3011 | ||
3012 | ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in | |
3013 | the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it | |
3014 | returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous | |
3015 | echo area contents. | |
3016 | ||
3017 | (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) | |
3018 | ||
3019 | ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument | |
3020 | NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the | |
3021 | requested feature cannot be loaded. | |
3022 | ||
3023 | ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the | |
3024 | foreground color, background color or stipple pattern | |
79214ddf | 3025 | means to clear out that attribute. |
a933dad1 DL |
3026 | |
3027 | ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame | |
3028 | gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. | |
3029 | ||
3030 | ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now | |
3031 | read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode | |
3032 | unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the | |
3033 | end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. | |
3034 | ||
3035 | ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on | |
3036 | the gap of the current buffer. | |
3037 | ||
3038 | ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way | |
3039 | to convert between character positions and byte positions in the | |
3040 | current buffer. | |
3041 | ||
3042 | ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to | |
3043 | facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. | |
3044 | These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check | |
3045 | it back in after any modifications have been made. | |
3046 | \f | |
3047 | * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 | |
3048 | ||
3049 | ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of | |
3050 | the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and | |
3051 | /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those | |
3052 | directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and | |
3053 | subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. | |
3054 | ||
3055 | Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose | |
3056 | names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. | |
3057 | Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory | |
3058 | which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use | |
3059 | these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. | |
3060 | ||
3061 | Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it | |
3062 | starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each | |
3063 | time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. | |
3064 | ||
3065 | This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs | |
3066 | Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically | |
3067 | to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the | |
3068 | subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a | |
3069 | `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired | |
3070 | results. | |
3071 | ||
3072 | ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from | |
3073 | GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers | |
3074 | that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in | |
3075 | fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. | |
3076 | \f | |
3077 | * Changes in Emacs 20.3 | |
3078 | ||
3079 | ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command | |
3080 | including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, | |
3081 | it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can | |
3082 | perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. | |
3083 | ||
3084 | ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a | |
3085 | specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired | |
3086 | region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing | |
3087 | further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo | |
3088 | command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made | |
3089 | within the region you originally specified, until either all of them | |
3090 | are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that | |
3091 | region. | |
3092 | ||
3093 | In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests | |
3094 | selective undo. | |
3095 | ||
3096 | ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are | |
3097 | unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte | |
3098 | buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same | |
3099 | effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs | |
3100 | Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. | |
3101 | ||
3102 | The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, | |
3103 | though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use | |
3104 | -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to | |
3105 | load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
3106 | ||
3107 | ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and | |
3108 | no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the | |
3109 | enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is | |
3110 | something that most users not do. | |
3111 | ||
3112 | ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste | |
3113 | operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. | |
3114 | The coding system can make a difference for communication with other | |
3115 | applications. | |
3116 | ||
3117 | C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and | |
3118 | pasting operations. | |
3119 | ||
3120 | ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by | |
3121 | setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks | |
3122 | like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different | |
3123 | printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting | |
3124 | `ps-printer-name'. | |
3125 | ||
3126 | ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a | |
3127 | minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember | |
3128 | any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it | |
3129 | except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting | |
3130 | incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor | |
3131 | hits a new word. | |
3132 | ||
3133 | Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for | |
3134 | Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not | |
3135 | to be confused by TeX commands. | |
3136 | ||
3137 | You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something | |
3138 | correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by | |
3139 | clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu | |
3140 | of various alternative replacements and actions. | |
3141 | ||
3142 | Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces | |
3143 | the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several | |
3144 | corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in | |
3145 | alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if | |
3146 | flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. | |
3147 | ||
3148 | Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if | |
3149 | flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. | |
3150 | ||
3151 | ** Changes in input method usage. | |
3152 | ||
3153 | Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among | |
3154 | the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p | |
3155 | respectively. | |
3156 | ||
3157 | You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. | |
3158 | ||
3159 | If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one | |
3160 | of the alternatives with Mouse-2. | |
3161 | ||
3162 | The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so | |
3163 | that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. | |
3164 | ||
3165 | If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. | |
3166 | ||
3167 | If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. | |
3168 | ||
3169 | If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only | |
3170 | when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. | |
3171 | ||
3172 | If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is | |
79214ddf | 3173 | given in the following case: |
a933dad1 DL |
3174 | o When you are using a complex input method. |
3175 | o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. | |
3176 | ||
3177 | If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting | |
3178 | input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, | |
3179 | and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, | |
3180 | setting it to t is helpful. | |
3181 | ||
3182 | The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. | |
3183 | ||
3184 | In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following | |
3185 | keys: | |
3186 | Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method | |
3187 | C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc | |
3188 | F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja | |
3189 | These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language | |
3190 | environment. | |
3191 | ||
3192 | ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file | |
3193 | names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the | |
3194 | minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to | |
3195 | get | |
3196 | ||
3197 | /usr/foo//etc/passwd | |
3198 | ||
3199 | which stands for the file /etc/passwd. | |
3200 | ||
3201 | Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. | |
3202 | Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. | |
3203 | ||
3204 | ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t | |
3205 | at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve | |
3206 | its owner and group. | |
3207 | ||
3208 | ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs | |
3209 | Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. | |
3210 | ||
3211 | ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle | |
3212 | contents before inserting the specified string on each line. | |
3213 | ||
3214 | ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle | |
3215 | which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column | |
3216 | in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified | |
3217 | by the left edge of the rectangle. | |
3218 | ||
3219 | ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, | |
3220 | increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit | |
3221 | C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful | |
3222 | for writing keyboard macros. | |
3223 | ||
3224 | ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, | |
3225 | files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The | |
3226 | frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as | |
3227 | the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define | |
3228 | additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and | |
3229 | info. | |
3230 | ||
3231 | ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. | |
3232 | ||
3233 | ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x | |
3234 | query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region | |
3235 | contents only. | |
3236 | ||
3237 | ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for | |
3238 | confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call | |
3239 | the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM | |
3240 | says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. | |
3241 | ||
3242 | ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited | |
3243 | non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file | |
3244 | literally. If you say no, it signals an error. | |
3245 | ||
3246 | ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature | |
3247 | now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. | |
3248 | Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is | |
3249 | inconsistent with Emacs conventions. | |
3250 | ||
3251 | ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or | |
3252 | failure if the command produces no output. | |
3253 | ||
3254 | ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window | |
3255 | manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move | |
3256 | the mouse. | |
3257 | ||
3258 | ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to | |
3259 | mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related | |
3260 | function and variable names. | |
3261 | ||
3262 | ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for | |
3263 | reading specific files. This has higher priority than | |
3264 | file-coding-system-alist. | |
3265 | ||
3266 | ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to | |
3267 | t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by | |
3268 | converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to | |
3269 | the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed | |
3270 | according to the current fontset. | |
3271 | ||
3272 | ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. | |
3273 | ||
3274 | The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of | |
3275 | that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and | |
3276 | nonascii-insert-offset. | |
3277 | ||
3278 | For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if | |
3279 | enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table | |
3280 | nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte | |
3281 | characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. | |
3282 | ||
3283 | ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get | |
3284 | an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. | |
3285 | ||
3286 | ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case | |
3287 | letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. | |
3288 | ||
3289 | ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables | |
3290 | are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant | |
3291 | command keys. | |
3292 | ||
3293 | ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for | |
3294 | user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. | |
3295 | ||
3296 | Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for | |
3297 | user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at | |
3298 | all variables that have documentation. | |
3299 | ||
3300 | ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer | |
3301 | shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way | |
3302 | that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable | |
3303 | minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap | |
3304 | it should show; the default is 20. | |
3305 | ||
3306 | Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, | |
3307 | the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole | |
3308 | of your input. | |
3309 | ||
3310 | ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize | |
3311 | all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in | |
3312 | recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as | |
3313 | argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all | |
3314 | the customizable options which were changed since that version. | |
3315 | Newly added options are included as well. | |
3316 | ||
3317 | If you don't specify a particular version number argument, | |
3318 | then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options | |
3319 | for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. | |
3320 | ||
3321 | This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the | |
3322 | Customize menu. | |
3323 | ||
3324 | ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out | |
3325 | the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. | |
3326 | ||
3327 | ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of | |
3328 | buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were | |
3329 | invoked. | |
3330 | ||
3331 | ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces | |
3332 | that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. | |
3333 | The default is 1. | |
3334 | ||
3335 | ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol | |
3336 | syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has | |
3337 | new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram | |
3338 | (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block | |
3339 | sensibly. | |
3340 | ||
3341 | ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. | |
3342 | ||
3343 | ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil | |
3344 | value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make | |
3345 | two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. | |
3346 | ||
3347 | ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a | |
3348 | reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string | |
3349 | for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically | |
3350 | every night. | |
3351 | ||
3352 | ** All you need to do, to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set | |
3353 | the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. | |
3354 | ||
3355 | ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to | |
3356 | read and post multi-lingual articles. | |
3357 | ||
3358 | ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when | |
3359 | doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should | |
3360 | be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden | |
3361 | outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and | |
3362 | the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is | |
79214ddf | 3363 | made invisible again. |
a933dad1 DL |
3364 | |
3365 | ** Mail reading and sending changes | |
3366 | ||
3367 | *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of | |
3368 | the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any | |
3369 | changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently | |
3370 | toggle. | |
3371 | ||
3372 | *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, | |
3373 | now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the | |
3374 | summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if | |
3375 | the message has no subject, is stored in the variable | |
3376 | rmail-default-body-file. | |
3377 | ||
3378 | *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no | |
3379 | longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they | |
3380 | handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. | |
3381 | ||
3382 | *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, | |
3383 | it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression | |
3384 | is evaluated to insert the signature. | |
3385 | ||
3386 | *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of | |
3387 | outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email | |
3388 | handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for | |
3389 | putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for | |
3390 | transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be | |
3391 | especially interested in trying feedmail. | |
3392 | ||
3393 | feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of | |
3394 | feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features | |
3395 | provided by feedmail are: | |
3396 | ||
3397 | **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and | |
3398 | stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); | |
3399 | there is also a queue for draft messages | |
3400 | ||
3401 | **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and | |
3402 | be prompted for confirmation | |
3403 | ||
3404 | **** does smart filling of address headers | |
3405 | ||
3406 | **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be | |
3407 | the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this | |
3408 | can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get | |
3409 | ||
3410 | **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting | |
3411 | the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, | |
3412 | /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new | |
3413 | function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp) | |
3414 | ||
3415 | ** Dired changes | |
3416 | ||
3417 | *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked | |
3418 | files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". | |
3419 | ||
3420 | *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily | |
3421 | run Dired on the directory name at point. | |
3422 | ||
3423 | *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of | |
3424 | files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match | |
3425 | for a specified regexp. | |
3426 | ||
3427 | ** VC Changes | |
3428 | ||
3429 | *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control | |
3430 | conveniently. | |
3431 | ||
3432 | *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much | |
3433 | faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary | |
3434 | Dired. | |
3435 | ||
3436 | VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the | |
3437 | directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive | |
3438 | listing of all files at or below the given directory which are | |
3439 | currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). | |
3440 | ||
3441 | You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, | |
3442 | then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set | |
3443 | vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version | |
3444 | control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' | |
3445 | on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. | |
3446 | ||
3447 | All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which | |
3448 | is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type | |
3449 | `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on | |
3450 | the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes | |
3451 | `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. | |
3452 | ||
3453 | The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to | |
3454 | toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all | |
79214ddf | 3455 | VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, |
a933dad1 DL |
3456 | `* l', to mark all files currently locked. |
3457 | ||
3458 | Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in | |
3459 | ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls | |
3460 | command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. | |
3461 | ||
3462 | *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working | |
3463 | file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff | |
3464 | session to resolve them. | |
3465 | ||
3466 | Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to | |
3467 | resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that | |
3468 | contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS | |
3469 | uses as well). | |
3470 | ||
3471 | *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new | |
3472 | command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When | |
3473 | you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify | |
3474 | either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that | |
3475 | branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. | |
3476 | If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, | |
3477 | using ediff. | |
3478 | ||
3479 | ** Changes in Font Lock | |
3480 | ||
3481 | *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face | |
3482 | are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical | |
3483 | use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are | |
3484 | unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for | |
3485 | compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. | |
3486 | ||
3487 | ** Frame name display changes | |
3488 | ||
3489 | *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current | |
3490 | frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and | |
3491 | raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or | |
3492 | when many frames are invisible or iconified. | |
3493 | ||
3494 | *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the | |
3495 | frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames | |
3496 | menu. | |
3497 | ||
3498 | ** Comint (subshell) changes | |
3499 | ||
3500 | *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a | |
3501 | subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility | |
3502 | with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. | |
3503 | ||
3504 | *** There are new commands in Comint mode. | |
3505 | ||
3506 | C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; | |
3507 | that is, the line after the last line you got. | |
3508 | You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. | |
3509 | ||
3510 | C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to | |
3511 | send the current line together with the following line, when you send | |
3512 | the following line. | |
3513 | ||
3514 | C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, | |
3515 | which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the | |
3516 | previously sent input. | |
3517 | ||
3518 | C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; | |
3519 | it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input | |
3520 | as the search string. | |
3521 | ||
3522 | *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll | |
3523 | automatically in compilation-mode windows. | |
3524 | ||
3525 | ** C mode changes | |
3526 | ||
3527 | *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, | |
3528 | and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is | |
3529 | assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro | |
79214ddf | 3530 | definition. |
a933dad1 DL |
3531 | |
3532 | *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified | |
3533 | (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. | |
3534 | Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" | |
3535 | style is still the default however. | |
3536 | ||
3537 | *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. | |
3538 | ||
3539 | *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which | |
3540 | are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer | |
3541 | them. They do not have key bindings by default. | |
3542 | ||
3543 | *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) | |
3544 | and M-e (c-end-of-statement). | |
3545 | ||
3546 | *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols | |
3547 | namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. | |
3548 | ||
3549 | *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets | |
3550 | makes the style variables local to that buffer only. | |
3551 | ||
3552 | *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, | |
3553 | c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. | |
3554 | ||
3555 | *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You | |
3556 | should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire | |
3557 | package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new | |
3558 | variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. | |
3559 | ||
3560 | ** Changes to hippie-expand. | |
3561 | ||
79214ddf | 3562 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If |
a933dad1 DL |
3563 | non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, |
3564 | which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. | |
3565 | ||
3566 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If | |
3567 | non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when | |
3568 | expanding dynamically. | |
3569 | ||
3570 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If | |
3571 | non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. | |
3572 | ||
3573 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If | |
3574 | non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in | |
3575 | this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose | |
3576 | expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. | |
3577 | ||
3578 | *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. | |
3579 | ||
3580 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
3581 | ||
3582 | *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable | |
3583 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during | |
3584 | automatic key generation. This replaces variable | |
3585 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches | |
3586 | against the first word in the title. | |
3587 | ||
3588 | *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just | |
3589 | capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, | |
3590 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with | |
79214ddf | 3591 | lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use |
a933dad1 | 3592 | lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the |
79214ddf | 3593 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. |
a933dad1 DL |
3594 | |
3595 | *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key | |
3596 | generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is | |
3597 | replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and | |
3598 | bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. | |
3599 | ||
3600 | ** Changes in vcursor.el. | |
3601 | ||
3602 | *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap | |
3603 | and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A | |
3604 | variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be | |
3605 | entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including | |
3606 | `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency | |
3607 | in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. | |
3608 | ||
3609 | *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the | |
3610 | Editing group once the package is loaded. | |
3611 | ||
3612 | *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is | |
3613 | generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set | |
3614 | vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour. | |
3615 | ||
3616 | *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the | |
3617 | vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. | |
3618 | ||
3619 | ** Ispell changes. | |
3620 | ||
79214ddf FP |
3621 | *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current |
3622 | buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings | |
a933dad1 DL |
3623 | are identified by syntax tables in effect. |
3624 | ||
3625 | *** Generic region skipping implemented. | |
3626 | A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will | |
3627 | and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user | |
3628 | defined. New applications and improvements made available by this | |
79214ddf | 3629 | include: |
a933dad1 DL |
3630 | |
3631 | o URLs are automatically skipped | |
3632 | o EMail message checking is vastly improved. | |
3633 | ||
3634 | *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. | |
3635 | ||
3636 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
3637 | ||
3638 | RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very | |
3639 | large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been | |
3640 | re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the | |
3641 | section `Optimizations' in the manual. | |
3642 | ||
3643 | *** New recursive parser. | |
3644 | ||
3645 | The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the | |
3646 | entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new | |
3647 | recursive parser scans the individual files. | |
3648 | ||
3649 | *** Parsing only part of a document. | |
79214ddf | 3650 | |
a933dad1 DL |
3651 | Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling |
3652 | partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of | |
3653 | the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. | |
3654 | ||
3655 | (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
3656 | ||
3657 | *** Storing parsing information in a file. | |
3658 | ||
3659 | This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use | |
3660 | ||
3661 | (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
3662 | ||
3663 | *** Using multiple selection buffers | |
3664 | ||
3665 | If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens | |
3666 | for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting | |
3667 | ||
3668 | (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
3669 | ||
3670 | *** References to external documents. | |
3671 | ||
3672 | The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external | |
3673 | documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external | |
3674 | documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument | |
3675 | macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with | |
3676 | RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in | |
3677 | the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). | |
3678 | The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. | |
3679 | ||
3680 | *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. | |
3681 | ||
3682 | The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, | |
3683 | and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. | |
3684 | ||
3685 | Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes | |
3686 | the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. | |
3687 | ||
3688 | *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers | |
3689 | ||
3690 | The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* | |
3691 | buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. | |
3692 | ||
3693 | *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. | |
3694 | ||
3695 | The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of | |
3696 | contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', | |
3697 | `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes | |
3698 | have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you | |
3699 | enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' | |
3700 | at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out | |
3701 | more. | |
3702 | ||
3703 | *** Support for the varioref package | |
3704 | ||
3705 | The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. | |
3706 | ||
3707 | *** New hooks | |
3708 | ||
3709 | Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, | |
3710 | and citations are created. These hooks are | |
3711 | `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', | |
3712 | `reftex-format-cite-function'. | |
3713 | ||
3714 | *** Citations outside LaTeX | |
3715 | ||
3716 | The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in | |
3717 | a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. | |
3718 | ||
3719 | *** Short context is no longer fontified. | |
3720 | ||
3721 | The short context in the label menu no longer copies the | |
3722 | fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be | |
3723 | fontified, use | |
3724 | ||
3725 | (setq reftex-refontify-context t) | |
3726 | ||
3727 | ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. | |
3728 | With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of | |
3729 | the file name within its directory; it only checks for other | |
3730 | directories that contain the same file name. | |
3731 | ||
3732 | Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file | |
3733 | Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary | |
3734 | file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to | |
3735 | Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that | |
3736 | have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer | |
3737 | names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other | |
3738 | directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present | |
3739 | directory. | |
3740 | ||
3741 | ** New modes and packages | |
3742 | ||
3743 | *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. | |
3744 | It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer | |
3745 | it, but some do not. | |
3746 | ||
3747 | *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL | |
3748 | code. | |
3749 | ||
3750 | *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the | |
3751 | current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move | |
3752 | around in a buffer. | |
3753 | ||
3754 | Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. | |
3755 | ||
3756 | *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author | |
3757 | uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should | |
3758 | be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an | |
3759 | established system of notation similar to Chess. | |
3760 | ||
3761 | *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp | |
3762 | documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style | |
3763 | guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. | |
3764 | ||
3765 | *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features | |
3766 | available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around | |
3767 | system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of | |
3768 | simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also | |
3769 | functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and | |
3770 | the like. | |
3771 | ||
3772 | *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to | |
3773 | identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. | |
3774 | ||
3775 | *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done | |
3776 | within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not | |
3777 | used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize | |
3778 | the user option `midnight-mode' to t. | |
3779 | ||
3780 | *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. | |
3781 | ||
3782 | apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files | |
3783 | samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files | |
3784 | fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files | |
3785 | x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files | |
3786 | hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc) | |
3787 | mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files | |
3788 | javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files | |
3789 | vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files | |
3790 | java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files | |
3791 | java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files | |
3792 | mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files | |
3793 | ||
3794 | Platform-specific modes: | |
3795 | ||
3796 | prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files | |
3797 | pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files | |
3798 | alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files | |
3799 | inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files | |
3800 | ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files | |
3801 | reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files | |
3802 | bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts | |
3803 | rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files | |
3804 | rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts | |
3805 | \f | |
3806 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published | |
3807 | ||
3808 | ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, | |
3809 | use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. | |
3810 | That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. | |
3811 | Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. | |
3812 | ||
3813 | Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether | |
3814 | you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives | |
3815 | consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
3816 | ||
3817 | ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, | |
3818 | and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can | |
3819 | specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for | |
3820 | searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. | |
3821 | ||
3822 | ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and | |
3823 | multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte | |
3824 | character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language | |
3825 | environment. | |
3826 | ||
3827 | ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now | |
3828 | take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt | |
3829 | string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the | |
3830 | current input method for reading this one event. | |
3831 | ||
3832 | ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte | |
3833 | now control whether to output certain characters as | |
3834 | backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte | |
3835 | non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte | |
3836 | characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing | |
3837 | in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). | |
3838 | \f | |
3839 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published | |
3840 | ||
3841 | ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version | |
3842 | of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. | |
3843 | ||
3844 | ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were | |
3845 | in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) | |
3846 | always increases point by 1. | |
3847 | ||
3848 | The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is | |
3849 | considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. | |
3850 | ||
3851 | See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
3852 | ||
3853 | ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. | |
3854 | Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's | |
3855 | default value changed. For example, | |
3856 | ||
3857 | (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." | |
3858 | :type 'integer | |
3859 | :group 'foo | |
3860 | :version "20.3") | |
3861 | ||
79214ddf | 3862 | (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." |
a933dad1 DL |
3863 | :version "20.3") |
3864 | ||
3865 | If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the | |
3866 | default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It | |
3867 | is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a | |
3868 | `:version' in the top level group. | |
3869 | ||
3870 | This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. | |
3871 | ||
3872 | ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name | |
3873 | starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. | |
3874 | ||
3875 | However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that | |
3876 | symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that | |
3877 | support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables | |
3878 | to themselves. | |
3879 | ||
3880 | If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, | |
3881 | this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any | |
3882 | values whatever. | |
3883 | ||
3884 | ** There is a new debugger command, R. | |
3885 | It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result | |
3886 | in the buffer *Debugger-record*. | |
3887 | ||
3888 | ** Frame-local variables. | |
3889 | ||
3890 | You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call | |
3891 | the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have | |
3892 | local bindings for that variable. | |
3893 | ||
3894 | These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a | |
3895 | frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling | |
3896 | modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the | |
3897 | parameter name. | |
3898 | ||
3899 | Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. | |
3900 | Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is | |
3901 | active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, | |
3902 | that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. | |
3903 | ||
3904 | It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not | |
3905 | clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a | |
3906 | very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect | |
3907 | through a window-local binding would not be very robust. | |
3908 | ||
3909 | ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing | |
3910 | "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when | |
3911 | evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form | |
3912 | makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. | |
3913 | See the documentation in sregex.el. | |
3914 | ||
3915 | ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which | |
3916 | is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to | |
3917 | parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. | |
3918 | The contents of this field are not yet finalized. | |
3919 | ||
3920 | ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. | |
3921 | If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. | |
3922 | ||
3923 | ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from | |
3924 | known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can | |
3925 | define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. | |
3926 | ||
3927 | ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE | |
3928 | when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as | |
3929 | it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the | |
3930 | history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. | |
3931 | ||
3932 | The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to | |
3933 | return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters | |
3934 | empty input. | |
3935 | ||
3936 | ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use | |
3937 | for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to | |
3938 | `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. | |
3939 | Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as | |
3940 | `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. | |
3941 | ||
3942 | ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, | |
3943 | echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: | |
3944 | a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a | |
3945 | default password to use if the user enters nothing. | |
3946 | ||
3947 | ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to | |
3948 | specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a | |
3949 | function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the | |
3950 | place where a break is being considered. If the function returns | |
3951 | non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. | |
3952 | ||
3953 | ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. | |
3954 | If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate | |
3955 | up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the | |
3956 | end of the window, even if this requires computation. | |
3957 | ||
3958 | ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME | |
3959 | which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. | |
3960 | If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. | |
3961 | ||
3962 | ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, | |
3963 | holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window | |
3964 | was directed to display this buffer. | |
3965 | ||
3966 | ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects | |
3967 | with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they | |
3968 | describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in | |
3969 | other words, if they would give the same results if passed to | |
3970 | set-window-configuration. | |
3971 | ||
3972 | ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two | |
3973 | window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer | |
3974 | positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of | |
3975 | windows and the choice of buffers to display. | |
3976 | ||
3977 | ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to | |
3978 | override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist | |
3979 | look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). | |
3980 | ||
3981 | If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a | |
3982 | non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the | |
3983 | map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. | |
3984 | ||
3985 | minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, | |
3986 | and it is meant to be set by major modes. | |
3987 | ||
3988 | ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string | |
3989 | except that it discards all text properties from the result. | |
3990 | ||
3991 | ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument | |
3992 | USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as | |
3993 | floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. | |
3994 | ||
3995 | ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory | |
3996 | to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined | |
3997 | in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems | |
3998 | it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. | |
3999 | ||
4000 | ** Menu changes | |
4001 | ||
4002 | *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the | |
4003 | keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now | |
4004 | better supported. | |
4005 | ||
4006 | The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls | |
4007 | a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when | |
4008 | you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you | |
4009 | can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; | |
4010 | then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. | |
4011 | ||
4012 | *** A new format for menu items is supported. | |
4013 | ||
4014 | In a keymap, a key binding that has the format | |
4015 | (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) | |
4016 | defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that | |
4017 | starts with the symbol `menu-item'. | |
4018 | ||
4019 | The format is: | |
4020 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or | |
4021 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) | |
4022 | where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item | |
4023 | string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. | |
4024 | The supported properties include | |
4025 | ||
4026 | :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
4027 | item is enabled. | |
4028 | :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
4029 | item should appear in the menu. | |
79214ddf | 4030 | :filter FILTER-FN |
a933dad1 DL |
4031 | FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, |
4032 | which will be REAL-BINDING. | |
4033 | It should return a binding to use instead. | |
4034 | :keys DESCRIPTION | |
4035 | DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard | |
4036 | binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with | |
4037 | `substitute-command-keys' before it is used. | |
4038 | :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE | |
4039 | KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent | |
4040 | keyboard binding. | |
4041 | :key-sequence nil | |
4042 | This means that the command normally has no | |
4043 | keyboard equivalent. | |
4044 | :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). | |
4045 | :button (TYPE . SELECTED) | |
4046 | TYPE is :toggle or :radio. | |
4047 | SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its | |
4048 | value says whether this button is currently selected. | |
4049 | ||
4050 | Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. | |
4051 | Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. | |
4052 | ||
4053 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. | |
4054 | ||
4055 | ** New event types | |
4056 | ||
4057 | *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a | |
4058 | mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that | |
4059 | corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, | |
4060 | which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: | |
4061 | ||
4062 | (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) | |
4063 | ||
4064 | where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
4065 | same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number | |
4066 | indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A | |
4067 | negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards | |
4068 | the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated | |
4069 | forward, away from the user. | |
4070 | ||
4071 | As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
4072 | ||
4073 | *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of | |
4074 | files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged | |
4075 | and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of | |
4076 | filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically | |
4077 | loaded into Emacs. The format is: | |
4078 | ||
4079 | (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) | |
4080 | ||
4081 | where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
4082 | same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames | |
4083 | that were dragged and dropped. | |
4084 | ||
4085 | As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
4086 | ||
4087 | ** Changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
4088 | ||
4089 | *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; | |
4090 | any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way | |
4091 | to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. | |
4092 | ||
4093 | *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You | |
4094 | can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character | |
4095 | that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. | |
4096 | ||
4097 | *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were | |
4098 | in Emacs 19 and before. | |
4099 | ||
4100 | The function chars-in-string has been deleted. | |
4101 | The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. | |
4102 | ||
4103 | *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current | |
4104 | buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or | |
4105 | unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte | |
4106 | representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. | |
4107 | ||
4108 | This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed | |
4109 | as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents | |
4110 | viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as | |
4111 | one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation | |
4112 | will count as two characters using unibyte representation. | |
4113 | ||
4114 | This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which | |
4115 | representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer | |
4116 | (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are | |
4117 | consistent with the new representation. | |
4118 | ||
4119 | *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte | |
4120 | representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care | |
4121 | about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; | |
4122 | however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
4123 | ||
4124 | The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of | |
4125 | nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them | |
4126 | using the table nonascii-translation-table. | |
4127 | ||
4128 | *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte | |
4129 | representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the | |
4130 | representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
4131 | ||
4132 | The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation | |
4133 | loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically | |
4134 | is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. | |
4135 | ||
4136 | *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
4137 | which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. | |
4138 | ||
4139 | *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
4140 | which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. | |
4141 | ||
4142 | *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare | |
4143 | portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, | |
4144 | so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. | |
4145 | You can specify whether to ignore case or not. | |
4146 | ||
4147 | *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that | |
4148 | it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. | |
4149 | ||
4150 | *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now | |
4151 | convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the | |
4152 | buffer or string being searched. | |
4153 | ||
4154 | One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of | |
4155 | [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when | |
4156 | searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when | |
4157 | searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no | |
4158 | obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what | |
4159 | you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular | |
4160 | expression [^\0-\177] works for it. | |
4161 | ||
4162 | *** Structure of coding system changed. | |
4163 | ||
4164 | All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named | |
4165 | by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector | |
4166 | which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector | |
4167 | as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this | |
4168 | vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define | |
4169 | your own alias name of a coding system by the function | |
4170 | define-coding-system-alias. | |
4171 | ||
4172 | The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use | |
4173 | the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to | |
4174 | access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, | |
4175 | pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, | |
4176 | character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and | |
4177 | safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 | |
4178 | 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter | |
4179 | `iso-8859-1'. | |
4180 | ||
4181 | Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. | |
4182 | The value of this property is a list of character sets which this | |
4183 | coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: | |
4184 | (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) | |
4185 | ||
4186 | Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can | |
4187 | also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they | |
4188 | are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode | |
4189 | the other character sets and read it back correctly. | |
4190 | ||
4191 | *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a | |
4192 | proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. | |
4193 | This function requires a user interaction. | |
4194 | ||
4195 | *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and | |
4196 | find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by | |
4197 | select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding | |
4198 | systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want | |
4199 | a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of | |
4200 | select-safe-coding-system. | |
4201 | ||
4202 | *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as | |
4203 | decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set | |
4204 | last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding | |
4205 | was done. | |
4206 | ||
4207 | *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be | |
4208 | used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of | |
4209 | coding systems used by some specific language environment. | |
4210 | ||
4211 | *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always | |
4212 | return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII | |
4213 | characters are found, they now return a list of single element | |
4214 | `undecided' or its subsidiaries. | |
4215 | ||
4216 | *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and | |
4217 | coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different | |
4218 | coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is | |
4219 | converted. | |
4220 | ||
4221 | *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a | |
4222 | coding system for communicating with other X clients. | |
4223 | ||
4224 | *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid | |
4225 | character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire | |
4226 | character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, | |
4227 | each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value | |
4228 | either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a | |
4229 | range of characters. | |
4230 | ||
4231 | *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a | |
4232 | Lisp object is a valid character code or not. | |
4233 | ||
4234 | *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character | |
4235 | in the current buffer at position POS. | |
4236 | ||
4237 | *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable | |
4238 | input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a | |
4239 | function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing | |
4240 | character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the | |
4241 | event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first | |
4242 | binding input-method-function to nil. | |
4243 | ||
4244 | The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input | |
4245 | method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as | |
4246 | input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by | |
4247 | the input method function are not passed to the input method function, | |
4248 | not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. | |
4249 | ||
4250 | The input method function is not called when reading the second and | |
4251 | subsequent events of a key sequence. | |
4252 | ||
4253 | *** You can customize any language environment by using | |
4254 | set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. | |
4255 | ||
4256 | The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo | |
4257 | customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For | |
4258 | instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language | |
4259 | environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up | |
4260 | exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. | |
4261 | \f | |
4262 | * Changes in Emacs 20.1 | |
4263 | ||
4264 | ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user | |
4265 | options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look | |
4266 | at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a | |
4267 | tree structure. | |
4268 | ||
4269 | M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each | |
4270 | user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. | |
4271 | ||
4272 | With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs | |
4273 | session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically | |
4274 | in your .emacs file.) | |
4275 | ||
4276 | ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. | |
4277 | You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. | |
4278 | ||
4279 | ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. | |
4280 | This makes more space in the mode line for other information. | |
4281 | ||
4282 | ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted | |
4283 | immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it | |
4284 | kills the region. | |
4285 | ||
4286 | The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they | |
4287 | delete the character before point, as usual. | |
4288 | ||
4289 | ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted | |
4290 | on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature | |
4291 | by setting search-highlight to nil.) | |
4292 | ||
4293 | ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to | |
4294 | insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, | |
4295 | the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked | |
4296 | onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the | |
4297 | history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the | |
4298 | past.) | |
4299 | ||
4300 | ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. | |
4301 | This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode | |
4302 | in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). | |
4303 | TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this | |
4304 | makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. | |
4305 | ||
4306 | As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, | |
4307 | and is an alias for it. | |
4308 | ||
4309 | If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, | |
4310 | use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. | |
4311 | ||
4312 | ** Scrolling changes | |
4313 | ||
4314 | *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen | |
4315 | position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. | |
4316 | ||
4317 | In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing | |
4318 | on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line | |
4319 | where it started. | |
4320 | ||
4321 | *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you | |
4322 | move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the | |
4323 | screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that | |
4324 | does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. | |
4325 | ||
4326 | *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the | |
4327 | top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point | |
4328 | comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs | |
4329 | recenters the window. | |
4330 | ||
4331 | ** International character set support (MULE) | |
4332 | ||
4333 | Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, | |
4334 | including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, | |
4335 | Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, | |
4336 | Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These | |
4337 | features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as | |
4338 | MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") | |
4339 | ||
4340 | Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard | |
4341 | coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte | |
4342 | character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide | |
4343 | variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back | |
4344 | into any of these coding systems when saving a file. | |
4345 | ||
4346 | Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, | |
4347 | generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs | |
4348 | supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or | |
4349 | language, to make it possible to type them. | |
4350 | ||
4351 | The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII | |
4352 | character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. | |
4353 | ||
4354 | The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain | |
4355 | to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. | |
4356 | ||
4357 | You can disable multibyte character support as follows: | |
4358 | ||
4359 | (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) | |
4360 | ||
4361 | Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte | |
4362 | characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second | |
4363 | argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are | |
4364 | already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte | |
4365 | characters for their work until they want to change. | |
4366 | ||
4367 | *** Input methods | |
4368 | ||
4369 | An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed | |
4370 | specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language | |
4371 | has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use | |
4372 | the same characters can share one input method). Some languages | |
4373 | support several input methods. | |
4374 | ||
4375 | The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into | |
4376 | another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods | |
4377 | work. | |
4378 | ||
4379 | A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of | |
4380 | characters into one letter. Many European input methods use | |
4381 | composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which | |
4382 | consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one | |
4383 | sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single | |
4384 | letter. | |
4385 | ||
4386 | The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed | |
4387 | by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. | |
4388 | First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone | |
4389 | marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are | |
4390 | mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". | |
4391 | ||
4392 | None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so | |
4393 | they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using | |
4394 | phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs | |
4395 | converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. | |
4396 | ||
4397 | Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled | |
4398 | word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; | |
4399 | typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if | |
4400 | the first guess is wrong. | |
4401 | ||
4402 | *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) | |
4403 | turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. | |
4404 | ||
4405 | If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each | |
4406 | byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as | |
4407 | they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for | |
4408 | the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. | |
4409 | ||
4410 | However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to | |
4411 | use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set | |
4412 | includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can | |
4413 | translate automatically to and from either one. | |
4414 | ||
4415 | *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. | |
4416 | ||
4417 | Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a | |
4418 | file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte | |
4419 | sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not | |
4420 | what you want. | |
4421 | ||
4422 | If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for | |
4423 | example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding | |
4424 | system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off | |
4425 | multibyte characters in that buffer. | |
4426 | ||
4427 | If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off | |
4428 | character conversion as well. | |
4429 | ||
4430 | *** Displaying international characters on X Windows. | |
4431 | ||
4432 | A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. | |
4433 | Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports | |
4434 | requires using many fonts. | |
4435 | ||
4436 | Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a | |
4437 | collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. | |
4438 | ||
4439 | A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by | |
4440 | the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you | |
4441 | have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as | |
4442 | you would use a font. | |
4443 | ||
4444 | If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it | |
4445 | specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot | |
4446 | display that character. It will display an empty box instead. | |
4447 | ||
4448 | The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters | |
4449 | (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII | |
4450 | characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height, | |
4451 | or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped, | |
4452 | and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil. | |
4453 | ||
4454 | *** Defining fontsets. | |
4455 | ||
4456 | Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still | |
4457 | chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset | |
4458 | with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. | |
4459 | ||
4460 | Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value | |
4461 | of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is | |
4462 | `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the | |
4463 | standard fontset are created automatically. | |
4464 | ||
4465 | If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' | |
4466 | argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the | |
4467 | FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name | |
4468 | with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short | |
4469 | name is `fontset-startup'. | |
4470 | ||
4471 | Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... | |
4472 | The resource value should have this form: | |
4473 | FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... | |
4474 | FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: | |
4475 | * most fields should be just the wild card "*". | |
4476 | * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" | |
4477 | * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. | |
4478 | The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number | |
4479 | of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. | |
4480 | CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and | |
4481 | FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set. | |
4482 | ||
4483 | Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the | |
4484 | last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. | |
4485 | You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. | |
4486 | ||
4487 | For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a | |
4488 | font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the | |
4489 | following resource, | |
4490 | Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 | |
4491 | the font for ASCII is generated as below: | |
4492 | -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 | |
4493 | Here is the substitution rule: | |
4494 | Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset | |
4495 | defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has | |
4496 | the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce | |
4497 | sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. | |
4498 | (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) | |
4499 | ||
4500 | The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the | |
4501 | fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call | |
4502 | that function explicitly to create a fontset. | |
4503 | ||
4504 | With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just | |
4505 | like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset | |
4506 | name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the | |
4507 | fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle | |
4508 | fontsets. | |
4509 | ||
4510 | *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs | |
4511 | defaults for a particular choice of language. | |
4512 | ||
4513 | Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input | |
4514 | method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when | |
4515 | visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have | |
4516 | already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The | |
4517 | language environment may also specify a default choice of coding | |
4518 | system for new files that you create. | |
4519 | ||
4520 | It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use | |
4521 | set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the | |
4522 | whole Emacs session. | |
4523 | ||
4524 | For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET | |
4525 | chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this | |
4526 | with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). | |
4527 | ||
4528 | *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) | |
4529 | specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This | |
4530 | specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving | |
4531 | the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the | |
4532 | coding systems that Emacs supports. | |
4533 | ||
4534 | *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) | |
4535 | lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. | |
4536 | This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. | |
4537 | After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system | |
4538 | is used for *the immediately following command*. | |
4539 | ||
4540 | So if the immediately following command is a command to read or | |
4541 | write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. | |
4542 | ||
4543 | If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, | |
4544 | then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. | |
4545 | ||
4546 | For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET | |
4547 | visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. | |
4548 | ||
4549 | *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- | |
4550 | construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- | |
4551 | to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also | |
4552 | specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end | |
4553 | of the file. | |
4554 | ||
4555 | *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies | |
4556 | the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character | |
4557 | code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are | |
4558 | translated into that character code. | |
4559 | ||
4560 | This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in | |
4561 | various countries to support the languages of those countries. | |
4562 | ||
4563 | By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. | |
4564 | ||
4565 | *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies | |
4566 | the coding system for keyboard input. | |
4567 | ||
4568 | Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals | |
4569 | with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, | |
4570 | some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. | |
4571 | ||
4572 | By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. | |
4573 | ||
4574 | Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an | |
4575 | input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that | |
4576 | translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed | |
4577 | to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are | |
4578 | designed to work with terminals. | |
4579 | ||
4580 | *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) | |
4581 | specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. | |
4582 | This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess | |
4583 | has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify | |
4584 | translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command | |
4585 | in the corresponding buffer. | |
4586 | ||
4587 | By default, process input and output are not translated at all. | |
4588 | ||
4589 | *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system | |
4590 | to use for encoding file names before operating on them. | |
4591 | It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. | |
4592 | ||
4593 | *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates | |
4594 | an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the | |
4595 | command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you | |
4596 | want to use. | |
4597 | ||
4598 | C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input | |
4599 | method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. | |
4600 | ||
4601 | *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard | |
4602 | layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this | |
4603 | remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify | |
4604 | which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. | |
4605 | ||
4606 | *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays | |
4607 | the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus | |
4608 | related information. | |
4609 | ||
4610 | *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called | |
4611 | HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various | |
4612 | scripts. | |
4613 | ||
4614 | *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays | |
4615 | information about the support for a particular language. | |
4616 | You specify the language as an argument. | |
4617 | ||
4618 | *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies | |
4619 | the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the | |
4620 | first dash. | |
4621 | ||
4622 | A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion | |
4623 | (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion | |
4624 | whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits | |
4625 | 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: | |
4626 | ||
4627 | A alternativnyj (Russian) | |
4628 | B big5 (Chinese) | |
4629 | C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) | |
4630 | C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) | |
4631 | D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) | |
4632 | E euc-japan (Japanese) | |
4633 | I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
4634 | J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) | |
4635 | K euc-korea (Korean) | |
4636 | R koi8 (Russian) | |
4637 | Q tibetan | |
4638 | S shift_jis (Japanese) | |
4639 | T lao | |
4640 | T tis620 (Thai) | |
4641 | V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) | |
4642 | i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
4643 | k iso-2022-kr (Korean) | |
4644 | v viqr (Vietnamese) | |
4645 | z hz (Chinese) | |
4646 | ||
4647 | When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), | |
4648 | two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file | |
4649 | coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for | |
4650 | keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. | |
4651 | ||
4652 | *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code | |
4653 | conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. | |
4654 | ||
4655 | When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically | |
4656 | into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with | |
4657 | rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing | |
4658 | Rmail files themselves. | |
4659 | ||
4660 | *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code | |
4661 | conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. | |
4662 | ||
4663 | Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system | |
4664 | for sending mail: | |
4665 | ||
4666 | - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. | |
4667 | - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. | |
4668 | - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, | |
4669 | if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. | |
4670 | - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. | |
4671 | ||
4672 | *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument | |
4673 | to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, | |
4674 | Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional | |
4675 | translations. | |
4676 | ||
4677 | ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion | |
4678 | of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command | |
4679 | insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer | |
4680 | without any conversion. | |
4681 | ||
4682 | ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. | |
4683 | You can now specify any number of octal digits. | |
4684 | RET terminates the digits and is discarded; | |
4685 | any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. | |
4686 | ||
4687 | ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for | |
4688 | functions, variables and file names used in your programs. | |
4689 | ||
4690 | Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. | |
4691 | Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. | |
4692 | ||
4693 | Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major | |
4694 | mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. | |
4695 | ||
4696 | ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command | |
4697 | complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name | |
4698 | in the buffer before point. | |
4699 | ||
4700 | With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of | |
4701 | symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that | |
4702 | you are using. | |
4703 | ||
4704 | With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, | |
4705 | just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). | |
4706 | ||
4707 | ** File locking works with NFS now. | |
4708 | ||
4709 | The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, | |
4710 | in the same directory as FILENAME. | |
4711 | ||
4712 | This means that collision detection between two different machines now | |
4713 | works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory | |
4714 | can become a bottleneck. | |
4715 | ||
4716 | The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection | |
4717 | does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot | |
4718 | create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the | |
4719 | file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are | |
4720 | rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is | |
4721 | so useful that the change is worth while. | |
4722 | ||
4723 | When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which | |
4724 | are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious | |
4725 | collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just | |
4726 | tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. | |
4727 | ||
4728 | ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, | |
4729 | it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call | |
4730 | show-paren-mode. | |
4731 | ||
4732 | ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted | |
4733 | selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
4734 | delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. | |
4735 | ||
4736 | ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words | |
4737 | within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
4738 | complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. | |
4739 | ||
4740 | ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, | |
4741 | it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also | |
4742 | set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. | |
4743 | ||
4744 | ** Changes in View mode. | |
4745 | ||
4746 | *** Several new commands are available in View mode. | |
4747 | Do H in view mode for a list of commands. | |
4748 | ||
4749 | *** There are two new commands for entering View mode: | |
4750 | view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. | |
4751 | ||
4752 | *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their | |
4753 | previous state. | |
4754 | ||
4755 | *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, | |
4756 | scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. | |
4757 | ||
4758 | *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If | |
4759 | non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, | |
4760 | not just the selected window. | |
4761 | ||
4762 | *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a | |
4763 | read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only | |
4764 | turns View mode on or off. | |
4765 | ||
4766 | *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls | |
4767 | how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, | |
4768 | delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. | |
4769 | ||
4770 | ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, | |
4771 | now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. | |
4772 | ||
4773 | ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, | |
4774 | has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is | |
4775 | presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks | |
4776 | which version to compare with. | |
4777 | ||
4778 | ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden | |
79214ddf | 4779 | blocks if a match is inside the block. |
a933dad1 DL |
4780 | |
4781 | The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match | |
4782 | is outside the block. By customizing the variable | |
4783 | isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily | |
4784 | shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. | |
4785 | ||
4786 | By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind | |
4787 | of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code | |
4788 | blocks, all of them or none. | |
4789 | ||
4790 | ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the | |
4791 | current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for | |
4792 | confirmation first. | |
4793 | ||
4794 | ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, | |
4795 | now changes the major mode according to that file name. | |
4796 | However, the mode will not be changed if | |
4797 | (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or | |
4798 | (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, | |
4799 | not suitable for ordinary files, or | |
4800 | (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. | |
4801 | ||
4802 | This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. | |
4803 | ||
4804 | However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then | |
4805 | these commands do not change the major mode. | |
4806 | ||
4807 | ** M-x occur changes. | |
4808 | ||
4809 | *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, | |
4810 | it performs a case-sensitive search. | |
4811 | ||
4812 | *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, | |
4813 | if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search | |
4814 | using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. | |
4815 | ||
4816 | ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted | |
4817 | in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the | |
4818 | window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in | |
4819 | that window unless you select to another window which shows the same | |
4820 | buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. | |
4821 | ||
4822 | ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates | |
4823 | after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings | |
4824 | appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents | |
4825 | come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. | |
4826 | ||
4827 | ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
4828 | selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the | |
4829 | buffers recently selected in the selected frame. | |
4830 | ||
4831 | ** Outline mode changes. | |
4832 | ||
4833 | *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). | |
4834 | ||
4835 | *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. | |
4836 | ||
4837 | ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if | |
4838 | you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. | |
4839 | Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that | |
4840 | was already active. | |
4841 | ||
4842 | The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not | |
4843 | unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then | |
4844 | get confused by it. | |
4845 | ||
4846 | If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must | |
4847 | set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. | |
4848 | ||
4849 | ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. | |
4850 | ||
4851 | *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
4852 | conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first | |
4853 | character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion | |
4854 | including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. | |
4855 | ||
4856 | The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has | |
4857 | mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always | |
4858 | copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. | |
4859 | ||
4860 | *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' | |
4861 | are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible | |
4862 | values. | |
4863 | ||
4864 | `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve | |
4865 | case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). | |
4866 | `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore | |
4867 | case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). | |
4868 | ||
4869 | ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a | |
4870 | certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they | |
4871 | can be. The default value is 30. | |
4872 | ||
4873 | ** Changes in Mail mode. | |
4874 | ||
4875 | *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. | |
4876 | Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail | |
4877 | composition mechanism you have selected with the variable | |
4878 | `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is | |
4879 | `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old | |
4880 | behavior. | |
4881 | ||
4882 | C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs | |
4883 | compose-mail-other-frame. | |
4884 | ||
4885 | *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use | |
4886 | the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are | |
4887 | replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the | |
4888 | buffer that shows the original message. | |
4889 | ||
4890 | *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, | |
4891 | with separator lines around the contents. | |
4892 | ||
4893 | *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases | |
4894 | in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias | |
4895 | definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not | |
4896 | need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. | |
4897 | ||
4898 | *** New features in the mail-complete command. | |
4899 | ||
4900 | **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, | |
4901 | for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style | |
4902 | controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. | |
4903 | Its values are like those of mail-from-style. | |
4904 | ||
4905 | **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command | |
4906 | to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in | |
4907 | /etc/passwd. | |
4908 | ||
4909 | **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read | |
4910 | to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: | |
4911 | /etc/passwd. | |
4912 | ||
4913 | ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of | |
4914 | special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a | |
4915 | directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a | |
4916 | reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. | |
4917 | ||
4918 | Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as | |
4919 | when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise | |
4920 | be taken to be magic. | |
4921 | ||
4922 | ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select | |
4923 | files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is | |
4924 | available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. | |
4925 | ||
4926 | M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. | |
4927 | (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) | |
4928 | ||
4929 | ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names | |
4930 | suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. | |
4931 | ||
4932 | In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. | |
4933 | ||
4934 | new key dired.el binding old key | |
4935 | ------- ---------------- ------- | |
4936 | * c dired-change-marks c | |
4937 | * m dired-mark m | |
4938 | * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) | |
4939 | * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) | |
4940 | * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) | |
4941 | * u dired-unmark u | |
4942 | * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL | |
4943 | * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-? | |
4944 | * ! dired-unmark-all-marks | |
4945 | * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m | |
4946 | * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} | |
4947 | * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ | |
4948 | ||
4949 | ** Rmail changes. | |
4950 | ||
4951 | *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it | |
4952 | saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer | |
4953 | chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing | |
4954 | each time you run it. | |
4955 | ||
4956 | *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls | |
4957 | whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. | |
4958 | ||
4959 | *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete | |
4960 | messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument | |
4961 | means to move in the opposite direction. | |
4962 | ||
4963 | *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets | |
4964 | you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. | |
4965 | ||
4966 | *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes | |
4967 | just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. | |
4968 | It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you | |
4969 | can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used | |
4970 | for output. | |
4971 | ||
4972 | ** Gnus changes. | |
4973 | ||
4974 | *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. | |
4975 | ||
79214ddf FP |
4976 | *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into |
4977 | Gnus. | |
a933dad1 | 4978 | |
79214ddf | 4979 | *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like |
a933dad1 DL |
4980 | `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. |
4981 | ||
4982 | *** Article washing status can be displayed in the | |
4983 | article mode line. | |
4984 | ||
4985 | *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. | |
4986 | ||
4987 | *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. | |
4988 | ||
4989 | (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) | |
4990 | ||
4991 | *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files | |
4992 | are to be considered home score and adapt files. See | |
4993 | `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. | |
4994 | ||
4995 | *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. | |
4996 | ||
4997 | *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. | |
4998 | ||
4999 | *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. | |
5000 | See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. | |
5001 | ||
5002 | *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. | |
5003 | Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be | |
5004 | used to pick articles. | |
5005 | ||
5006 | *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to | |
5007 | another have been added. | |
5008 | ||
5009 | `M-x gnus-change-server' | |
5010 | ||
5011 | *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when | |
5012 | generating lines in buffers. | |
5013 | ||
5014 | *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with | |
5015 | `M-C-_'. | |
5016 | ||
5017 | *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. | |
5018 | ||
5019 | *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: | |
5020 | ||
5021 | (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) | |
5022 | ||
5023 | *** Scores can be decayed. | |
79214ddf | 5024 | |
a933dad1 DL |
5025 | (setq gnus-decay-scores t) |
5026 | ||
5027 | *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The | |
5028 | Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. | |
5029 | ||
5030 | *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from | |
5031 | the native server. | |
5032 | ||
5033 | `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' | |
5034 | ||
5035 | *** A new command for reading collections of documents | |
5036 | (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'. | |
5037 | ||
5038 | *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. | |
5039 | ||
5040 | *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post | |
5041 | even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. | |
5042 | ||
5043 | *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines | |
5044 | (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. | |
5045 | ||
5046 | Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such | |
5047 | a group. | |
5048 | ||
5049 | *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard | |
5050 | sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. | |
5051 | ||
5052 | See the commands under the `T S' submap. | |
5053 | ||
5054 | *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. | |
5055 | ||
5056 | See the commands under the `G P' submap. | |
5057 | ||
5058 | *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. | |
79214ddf | 5059 | |
a933dad1 DL |
5060 | Use the `Y c' command. |
5061 | ||
5062 | *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. | |
5063 | ||
5064 | *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. | |
5065 | ||
5066 | `M-x nnmail-split-history' | |
5067 | ||
5068 | *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk | |
5069 | from incoming mail before saving the mail. | |
79214ddf | 5070 | |
a933dad1 DL |
5071 | See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. |
5072 | ||
5073 | *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. | |
5074 | ||
5075 | *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute | |
5076 | the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. | |
5077 | ||
5078 | (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) | |
5079 | ||
5080 | Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically | |
5081 | and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime | |
5082 | from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this | |
5083 | hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling | |
5084 | this issue.) | |
5085 | ||
5086 | Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems | |
5087 | automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a | |
5088 | particular news group. This can be done by: | |
5089 | ||
5090 | (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) | |
5091 | ||
5092 | Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree | |
5093 | of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under | |
5094 | "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding | |
5095 | system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both | |
5096 | for reading and posting). | |
5097 | ||
5098 | CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form | |
5099 | (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
5100 | Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the | |
5101 | newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages | |
5102 | there. | |
5103 | ||
5104 | Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by | |
5105 | default. Here are some of these default settings: | |
5106 | ||
5107 | (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) | |
5108 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
5109 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
5110 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) | |
5111 | (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) | |
5112 | ||
5113 | When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; | |
5114 | the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. | |
5115 | ||
5116 | ** CC mode changes. | |
5117 | ||
5118 | *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) | |
5119 | code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global | |
5120 | values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do | |
5121 | this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. | |
5122 | Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is | |
5123 | loaded. | |
5124 | ||
5125 | If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, | |
79214ddf | 5126 | Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode |
a933dad1 | 5127 | style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers |
79214ddf FP |
5128 | share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set |
5129 | c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you | |
a933dad1 DL |
5130 | must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. |
5131 | ||
5132 | *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name | |
5133 | of the current buffer. | |
5134 | ||
5135 | *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because | |
5136 | it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles | |
5137 | of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. | |
5138 | ||
5139 | *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C | |
5140 | style that the Python developers like. | |
5141 | ||
5142 | *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. | |
5143 | This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, | |
5144 | just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. | |
5145 | ||
5146 | ** VC Changes [new] | |
5147 | ||
5148 | ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot | |
5149 | name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current | |
5150 | directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). | |
5151 | ||
5152 | This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common | |
5153 | master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other | |
5154 | developers. | |
5155 | ||
5156 | You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q | |
5157 | RET in a buffer visiting that file. | |
5158 | ||
5159 | *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by | |
5160 | other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a | |
5161 | writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then | |
5162 | calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. | |
5163 | ||
5164 | *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for | |
5165 | version numbers, based on the current state of the file. | |
5166 | ||
5167 | ** Calendar changes. | |
5168 | ||
5169 | A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses | |
5170 | of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this | |
5171 | for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years. | |
5172 | ||
5173 | ** ps-print changes | |
5174 | ||
79214ddf | 5175 | There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout. |
a933dad1 DL |
5176 | |
5177 | *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns | |
5178 | ||
5179 | The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print | |
5180 | formats for; it should contain one of the symbols: | |
5181 | `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid' | |
5182 | `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5' | |
5183 | It defaults to `letter'. | |
5184 | If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'. | |
5185 | ||
5186 | The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation | |
79214ddf | 5187 | of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode, |
a933dad1 DL |
5188 | non-nil means "landscape" mode. |
5189 | ||
5190 | The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer. | |
5191 | It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode. | |
79214ddf | 5192 | It defaults to 1. |
a933dad1 DL |
5193 | |
5194 | *** Horizontal layout | |
5195 | ||
5196 | The horizontal layout is determined by the variables | |
5197 | `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'. | |
5198 | All are measured in points. | |
5199 | ||
5200 | *** Vertical layout | |
5201 | ||
5202 | The vertical layout is determined by the variables | |
5203 | `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'. | |
5204 | All are measured in points. | |
5205 | ||
5206 | *** Headers | |
5207 | ||
5208 | If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then | |
5209 | `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the | |
5210 | margin above the text. | |
5211 | ||
79214ddf | 5212 | If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy |
a933dad1 DL |
5213 | framing box is printed around the header. |
5214 | ||
5215 | The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines', | |
5216 | `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'. | |
5217 | ||
79214ddf FP |
5218 | The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad', |
5219 | `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and | |
a933dad1 DL |
5220 | `ps-header-font-size'. |
5221 | ||
5222 | *** Font managing | |
5223 | ||
5224 | The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be | |
5225 | used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist | |
5226 | `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding | |
5227 | elements to this alist. | |
5228 | ||
79214ddf | 5229 | The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font |
a933dad1 DL |
5230 | for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points. |
5231 | ||
5232 | ** hideshow changes. | |
5233 | ||
5234 | *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for | |
79214ddf | 5235 | C++, ; for lisp). |
a933dad1 DL |
5236 | |
5237 | *** Support for java-mode added. | |
5238 | ||
5239 | *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments | |
5240 | in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. | |
5241 | ||
5242 | *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at | |
5243 | the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your | |
5244 | way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. | |
5245 | ||
5246 | *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more | |
5247 | robust and a lot faster. | |
5248 | ||
79214ddf | 5249 | *** A block beginning can span multiple lines. |
a933dad1 DL |
5250 | |
5251 | *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow | |
5252 | to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the | |
5253 | documentation for more details. | |
5254 | ||
5255 | ** Changes in Enriched mode. | |
5256 | ||
5257 | *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is | |
5258 | filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent | |
5259 | of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in | |
5260 | use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled | |
5261 | the next time unless the fill-column is different. | |
5262 | ||
5263 | *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs | |
5264 | distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines | |
5265 | as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked | |
5266 | as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. | |
5267 | ||
5268 | ** Font Lock mode | |
5269 | ||
5270 | *** Custom support | |
5271 | ||
5272 | The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and | |
5273 | font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the | |
5274 | faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom | |
5275 | group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in | |
5276 | your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should | |
5277 | consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. | |
5278 | ||
5279 | You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. | |
5280 | ||
5281 | *** Maximum decoration | |
5282 | ||
5283 | Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by | |
5284 | default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level | |
5285 | of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration | |
5286 | supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil | |
5287 | to get the old behavior. | |
5288 | ||
5289 | *** New support | |
5290 | ||
5291 | Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. | |
5292 | ||
5293 | Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes | |
5294 | support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. | |
5295 | ||
5296 | *** Configurable support | |
5297 | ||
5298 | Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for | |
5299 | additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, | |
5300 | c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, | |
5301 | java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a | |
5302 | list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value | |
5303 | of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the | |
5304 | convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. | |
5305 | ||
5306 | Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever | |
5307 | way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make | |
5308 | it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. | |
5309 | ||
5310 | *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support | |
5311 | ||
5312 | You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own | |
5313 | highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, | |
5314 | for any mode. | |
5315 | ||
5316 | For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: | |
5317 | ||
5318 | (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) | |
5319 | ||
5320 | in your ~/.emacs. | |
5321 | ||
5322 | *** New faces | |
5323 | ||
5324 | Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and | |
5325 | font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, | |
5326 | distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought | |
5327 | to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. | |
5328 | ||
5329 | *** Changes to fast-lock support mode | |
5330 | ||
5331 | The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process | |
5332 | cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the | |
5333 | same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. | |
5334 | ||
5335 | *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode | |
5336 | ||
5337 | The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify | |
5338 | according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use | |
5339 | the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If | |
5340 | non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be | |
5341 | refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only | |
5342 | the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy | |
5343 | Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode. | |
5344 | ||
5345 | This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. | |
5346 | For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if | |
5347 | this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly | |
5348 | refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line | |
5349 | containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use | |
5350 | the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. | |
5351 | ||
5352 | As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: | |
5353 | ||
5354 | Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. | |
5355 | Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. | |
5356 | Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the | |
5357 | new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. | |
5358 | ||
5359 | If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those | |
5360 | settings. | |
5361 | ||
5362 | ** Ada mode changes. | |
5363 | ||
5364 | *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. | |
5365 | If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same | |
5366 | procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but | |
5367 | you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure | |
5368 | stubs. | |
5369 | ||
5370 | *** There are two new commands: | |
5371 | - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer | |
5372 | - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. | |
5373 | ||
5374 | The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', | |
5375 | `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and | |
79214ddf | 5376 | `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. |
a933dad1 DL |
5377 | |
5378 | *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level | |
5379 | is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. | |
5380 | Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. | |
5381 | ||
5382 | *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of | |
5383 | formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, | |
5384 | places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one | |
5385 | space between a comma and the beginning of a word. | |
5386 | ||
5387 | ** Scheme mode changes. | |
5388 | ||
5389 | *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp | |
5390 | mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used | |
5391 | for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables | |
5392 | with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer | |
5393 | have any effect. | |
5394 | ||
5395 | If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is | |
5396 | still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to | |
5397 | scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation | |
5398 | variables as buffer-local variables. | |
5399 | ||
5400 | *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. | |
5401 | Use M-x dsssl-mode. | |
5402 | ||
133c9e59 GM |
5403 | ** Changes to the emacsclient program |
5404 | ||
5405 | *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells | |
a933dad1 DL |
5406 | it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the |
5407 | buffer in Emacs. | |
5408 | ||
133c9e59 GM |
5409 | *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to |
5410 | use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable | |
5411 | ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line | |
5412 | option takes precedence. | |
5413 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5414 | ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area |
5415 | constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point | |
5416 | (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). | |
5417 | ||
5418 | ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, | |
5419 | which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just | |
5420 | the current defun. | |
5421 | ||
5422 | ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all | |
5423 | following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. | |
5424 | ||
5425 | ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, | |
5426 | and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if | |
5427 | necessary). | |
5428 | ||
5429 | ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, | |
5430 | if there are any registers that save positions in the file, | |
5431 | these register values no longer become completely useless. | |
5432 | If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are | |
5433 | asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, | |
5434 | it visits the file and then goes to the same position. | |
5435 | ||
5436 | ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for | |
5437 | example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may | |
5438 | be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever | |
5439 | you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. | |
5440 | ||
5441 | You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the | |
5442 | variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a | |
5443 | file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and | |
5444 | revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but | |
5445 | only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. | |
5446 | ||
5447 | ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font | |
5448 | since it applies only to the current frame. | |
5449 | ||
5450 | ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the | |
5451 | file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, | |
5452 | and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) | |
5453 | ||
5454 | This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of | |
5455 | multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local | |
5456 | variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for | |
5457 | tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document | |
5458 | instead of just the file you are editing. | |
5459 | ||
5460 | ** RefTeX mode | |
5461 | ||
5462 | RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref | |
5463 | and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of | |
5464 | different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for | |
5465 | multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and | |
5466 | turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: | |
5467 | ||
79214ddf | 5468 | C-c ( reftex-label |
a933dad1 DL |
5469 | Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and |
5470 | knows which kind of label is needed. | |
5471 | ||
5472 | C-c ) reftex-reference | |
5473 | Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the | |
5474 | label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. | |
5475 | ||
5476 | C-c [ reftex-citation | |
5477 | Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX | |
5478 | database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. | |
5479 | ||
5480 | C-c & reftex-view-crossref | |
5481 | Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. | |
5482 | ||
5483 | C-c = reftex-toc | |
5484 | Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you | |
5485 | can quickly jump to every section. | |
79214ddf | 5486 | |
a933dad1 DL |
5487 | Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional |
5488 | commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. | |
5489 | Full documentation and customization examples are in the file | |
5490 | reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: | |
5491 | C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el | |
5492 | ||
5493 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
5494 | ||
5495 | *** Info documentation is now available. | |
5496 | ||
5497 | *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused | |
5498 | both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. | |
5499 | ||
5500 | *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to | |
5501 | bibtex-user-optional-fields. | |
5502 | ||
5503 | *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote | |
5504 | (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). | |
5505 | ||
5506 | *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete | |
5507 | entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by | |
5508 | appropriate functions. | |
5509 | ||
5510 | *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of | |
5511 | entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h. | |
5512 | ||
5513 | *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has | |
5514 | been cleaned. | |
5515 | ||
5516 | *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables | |
5517 | bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. | |
5518 | ||
5519 | *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries | |
5520 | shall be delimited. | |
5521 | ||
5522 | *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of | |
5523 | bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and | |
5524 | bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. | |
5525 | ||
5526 | *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor | |
5527 | field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are | |
5528 | prefixed with `ALT'. | |
5529 | ||
5530 | *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable | |
5531 | bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many | |
5532 | formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable | |
5533 | documentation). | |
5534 | ||
5535 | *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See | |
5536 | documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions | |
5537 | for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. | |
5538 | ||
5539 | *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if | |
5540 | comma should be inserted at end of last field. | |
5541 | ||
5542 | *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if | |
5543 | alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal | |
5544 | signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). | |
5545 | ||
5546 | *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. | |
5547 | ||
5548 | *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. | |
5549 | ||
5550 | *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database | |
5551 | from alien sources. | |
5552 | ||
5553 | *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) | |
5554 | to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in | |
5555 | crossref entries. | |
5556 | ||
5557 | *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or | |
5558 | region. | |
5559 | ||
5560 | *** Added support for imenu. | |
5561 | ||
5562 | *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead | |
5563 | of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a | |
5564 | `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. | |
5565 | `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. | |
5566 | ||
5567 | *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files | |
5568 | from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. | |
5569 | ||
5570 | ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. | |
5571 | ||
30a009a5 | 5572 | ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow. |
047f434a | 5573 | |
a933dad1 DL |
5574 | ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the |
5575 | functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. | |
5576 | Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory | |
5577 | as an argument. | |
5578 | ||
5579 | When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read | |
5580 | and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). | |
5581 | ||
5582 | ** browse-url changes | |
5583 | ||
5584 | *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), | |
5585 | Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window | |
5586 | (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic | |
5587 | non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated | |
5588 | customization variables. | |
5589 | ||
5590 | *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. | |
5591 | ||
5592 | *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across | |
5593 | lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps | |
5594 | (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. | |
5595 | ||
5596 | ** Changes in Ediff | |
5597 | ||
5598 | *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel | |
5599 | pops up the Info file for this command. | |
5600 | ||
5601 | *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether | |
5602 | the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when | |
5603 | merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different | |
5604 | directories). | |
5605 | ||
5606 | *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare | |
5607 | and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of | |
5608 | files in the same directory. | |
5609 | ||
5610 | *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. | |
5611 | The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug | |
5612 | related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) | |
5613 | ||
5614 | ** Changes in Viper | |
5615 | ||
5616 | *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip | |
79214ddf | 5617 | *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- |
a933dad1 DL |
5618 | instead of vip-. |
5619 | *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. | |
79214ddf | 5620 | *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next |
a933dad1 DL |
5621 | Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. |
5622 | *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. | |
5623 | *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. | |
5624 | *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor | |
5625 | color when Viper is in insert state. | |
5626 | *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, | |
5627 | Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable | |
5628 | viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. | |
5629 | ||
5630 | ** Etags changes. | |
5631 | ||
5632 | *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by | |
5633 | default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. | |
5634 | Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag | |
5635 | variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does | |
5636 | not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. | |
5637 | ||
5638 | *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. | |
5639 | ||
5640 | *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" | |
5641 | constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java. | |
5642 | ||
5643 | *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are | |
5644 | recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). | |
5645 | In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. | |
5646 | ||
5647 | *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and | |
5648 | C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags | |
5649 | recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, | |
5650 | methods and protocols. | |
5651 | ||
5652 | *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension | |
5653 | .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in | |
5654 | column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a | |
5655 | paragraph name. | |
5656 | ||
5657 | *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of | |
5658 | an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression | |
5659 | at least M times and as many as N times. | |
5660 | ||
5661 | ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert | |
5662 | in files has changed slightly. | |
5663 | ||
5664 | With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, | |
5665 | time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. | |
5666 | This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility | |
5667 | with old time-stamp-format values. | |
5668 | ||
5669 | In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign | |
5670 | (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. | |
5671 | This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility | |
5672 | reasons. | |
5673 | ||
5674 | In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their | |
5675 | natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a | |
5676 | fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon | |
5677 | (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical | |
5678 | time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are | |
5679 | specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". | |
5680 | ||
5681 | Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the | |
5682 | case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit | |
5683 | truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. | |
5684 | ||
5685 | The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are | |
5686 | being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the | |
5687 | future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being | |
5688 | recommended now will continue to work then. | |
5689 | ||
5690 | See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for | |
5691 | details. | |
5692 | ||
5693 | ** There are some additional major modes: | |
5694 | ||
5695 | dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. | |
5696 | m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. | |
5697 | meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. | |
5698 | ||
5699 | ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you | |
5700 | copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell | |
5701 | into Emacs. | |
5702 | ||
5703 | ** New Lisp packages include: | |
5704 | ||
5705 | *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. | |
5706 | ||
5707 | *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might | |
5708 | be used for adding some indecent words to your email. | |
5709 | ||
5710 | *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. | |
5711 | ||
5712 | *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes | |
5713 | in shell buffers. | |
5714 | ||
5715 | *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. | |
5716 | See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' | |
5717 | and `elint-defun'. | |
5718 | ||
5719 | *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is | |
5720 | meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary | |
5721 | ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within | |
5722 | strings or comments. | |
5723 | ||
5724 | These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an | |
5725 | abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, | |
5726 | you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these | |
5727 | insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text | |
5728 | at these points. | |
5729 | ||
5730 | *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you | |
5731 | can visit them by short forms of their names. | |
5732 | ||
5733 | *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded | |
5734 | Emacs Lisp function at point. | |
5735 | ||
5736 | *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. | |
5737 | ||
5738 | *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like | |
5739 | switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. | |
5740 | ||
5741 | *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. | |
5742 | ||
5743 | *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. | |
5744 | ||
5745 | *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. | |
5746 | ||
5747 | *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations | |
5748 | from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. | |
5749 | ||
5750 | *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. | |
5751 | You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically | |
5752 | inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its | |
5753 | original place after inserting the copy. | |
5754 | ||
5755 | *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 | |
5756 | on the buffer. | |
5757 | ||
5758 | You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the | |
5759 | velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll | |
5760 | (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. | |
5761 | ||
5762 | Enable mouse-drag with: | |
5763 | (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) | |
5764 | -or- | |
5765 | (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) | |
5766 | ||
5767 | *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have | |
5768 | mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. | |
5769 | ||
5770 | *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. | |
5771 | It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. | |
5772 | ||
5773 | *** ogonek | |
5774 | ||
5775 | The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of | |
5776 | Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various | |
5777 | platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and | |
5778 | TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to | |
5779 | ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to | |
5780 | prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for | |
5781 | instance) and vice versa. | |
5782 | ||
5783 | To use this package load it using | |
5784 | M-x load-library [enter] ogonek | |
5785 | Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of | |
79214ddf | 5786 | M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish |
a933dad1 DL |
5787 | M-x ogonek-how -- in English |
5788 | The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the | |
5789 | ways of customization in `.emacs'. | |
5790 | ||
5791 | *** Interface to ph. | |
5792 | ||
5793 | Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) | |
5794 | ||
5795 | The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory | |
5796 | services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to | |
5797 | these servers. | |
5798 | ||
5799 | *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. | |
5800 | ||
5801 | *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. | |
5802 | You can move the virtual cursor with special commands | |
5803 | while the real cursor does not move. | |
5804 | ||
5805 | *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up | |
5806 | for visiting your favorite web sites. | |
5807 | ||
5808 | *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, | |
5809 | so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. | |
5810 | ||
5811 | ** movemail change | |
5812 | ||
5813 | Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP | |
5814 | mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer | |
5815 | supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the | |
5816 | user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. | |
5817 | ||
5818 | This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. | |
5819 | \f | |
5820 | * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. | |
5821 | ||
5822 | ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. | |
5823 | ||
5824 | Emacs handles three different conventions for representing | |
5825 | end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the | |
5826 | Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific | |
5827 | file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special | |
5828 | file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. | |
5829 | ||
5830 | To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use | |
5831 | C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different | |
5832 | coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly | |
5833 | specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with | |
5834 | LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to | |
5835 | save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. | |
5836 | \f | |
5837 | * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 | |
5838 | ||
5839 | ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in | |
5840 | Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And | |
5841 | vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in | |
5842 | Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. | |
5843 | ||
5844 | ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed | |
5845 | to start with w32- instead of win32-. | |
5846 | ||
5847 | In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We | |
5848 | don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it | |
5849 | "win". | |
5850 | ||
5851 | ** Basic Lisp changes | |
5852 | ||
5853 | *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically | |
5854 | evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. | |
5855 | ||
5856 | *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now | |
5857 | be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program | |
5858 | or by the user. | |
5859 | ||
5860 | The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. | |
5861 | ||
5862 | *** There are new macros `when' and `unless' | |
5863 | ||
5864 | (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) | |
5865 | (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) | |
5866 | ||
5867 | *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their | |
5868 | usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of | |
5869 | its argument. | |
5870 | ||
5871 | *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. | |
5872 | ||
5873 | *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. | |
5874 | ||
5875 | *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. | |
5876 | ||
5877 | *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an | |
5878 | error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives | |
5879 | include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the | |
5880 | `format' function. | |
5881 | ||
5882 | *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el | |
5883 | or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file | |
5884 | whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. | |
5885 | ||
5886 | *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain | |
5887 | either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on | |
5888 | adding one of these suffixes. | |
5889 | ||
5890 | *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE | |
5891 | which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. | |
79214ddf | 5892 | If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. |
a933dad1 DL |
5893 | |
5894 | We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, | |
5895 | because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. | |
5896 | ||
5897 | *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. | |
5898 | ||
5899 | *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. | |
5900 | You must load the `cl' library to define it. | |
5901 | ||
5902 | *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression | |
5903 | conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: | |
5904 | ||
5905 | (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) | |
5906 | ||
5907 | BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. | |
5908 | BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. | |
5909 | ||
5910 | *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the | |
5911 | choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or | |
5912 | restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' | |
5913 | works using `save-current-buffer'. | |
5914 | ||
5915 | *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and | |
5916 | write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value | |
5917 | of the last form. | |
5918 | ||
5919 | *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, | |
5920 | which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the | |
5921 | last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) | |
5922 | as the last form. | |
5923 | ||
5924 | *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain | |
5925 | characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the | |
5926 | matches. | |
5927 | ||
5928 | For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). | |
5929 | ||
5930 | *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions | |
5931 | with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. | |
5932 | Then it returns that string. | |
5933 | ||
5934 | For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', | |
5935 | ||
5936 | (with-output-to-string | |
5937 | (princ "The buffer is ") | |
5938 | (princ (buffer-name))) | |
5939 | ||
5940 | returns "The buffer is foo". | |
5941 | ||
5942 | ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters | |
5943 | is non-nil. | |
5944 | ||
5945 | These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the | |
5946 | buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte | |
5947 | characters that occupy several buffer positions each. | |
5948 | ||
5949 | *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in | |
5950 | a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). | |
5951 | ||
5952 | Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; | |
5953 | character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. | |
5954 | Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer | |
5955 | position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole | |
5956 | characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to | |
5957 | (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). | |
5958 | ||
5959 | ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. | |
5960 | Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent | |
5961 | non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte | |
5962 | characters". | |
5963 | ||
5964 | The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 | |
5965 | through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called | |
5966 | "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the | |
5967 | range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the | |
5968 | leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. | |
5969 | ||
5970 | *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore | |
5971 | (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a | |
5972 | multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a | |
5973 | character, which may be more than one buffer position. | |
5974 | ||
5975 | This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is | |
5976 | always one buffer position, need to be changed. | |
5977 | ||
5978 | However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. | |
79214ddf | 5979 | |
a933dad1 DL |
5980 | *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, |
5981 | because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters | |
5982 | have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, | |
5983 | the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, | |
5984 | guaranteed. | |
5985 | ||
5986 | *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is | |
5987 | between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a | |
5988 | character). | |
5989 | ||
5990 | When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: | |
5991 | ||
5992 | 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, | |
5993 | 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, | |
5994 | 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, | |
5995 | 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, | |
5996 | 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. | |
5997 | ||
5998 | *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. | |
5999 | ||
6000 | *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function | |
6001 | `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be | |
6002 | more than the number of characters. | |
6003 | ||
6004 | You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing | |
6005 | it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, | |
6006 | \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which | |
6007 | is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to | |
6008 | follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and | |
6009 | newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. | |
6010 | ||
6011 | *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters | |
6012 | and returns a string containing those characters. | |
6013 | ||
6014 | *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. | |
6015 | (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX | |
6016 | counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a | |
6017 | character, sref signals an error. | |
6018 | ||
6019 | *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters | |
6020 | in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the | |
6021 | string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
6022 | ||
6023 | *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters | |
6024 | in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the | |
6025 | region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
6026 | ||
6027 | *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of | |
6028 | the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string | |
6029 | to a vector of the characters in it. | |
6030 | ||
6031 | *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents | |
6032 | of a string. You call it as follows: | |
6033 | ||
6034 | (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) | |
6035 | ||
6036 | This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in | |
6037 | STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. | |
6038 | This function really does alter the contents of STRING. | |
6039 | Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, | |
6040 | it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. | |
6041 | ||
6042 | *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, | |
6043 | if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
6044 | ||
6045 | *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, | |
6046 | if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
6047 | ||
6048 | *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, | |
6049 | to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does | |
6050 | not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string | |
6051 | which contains all or just part of the existing string.) | |
6052 | ||
6053 | (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) | |
6054 | ||
6055 | This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. | |
6056 | ||
6057 | The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. | |
6058 | If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string | |
6059 | are not included in the resulting value. | |
6060 | ||
6061 | The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added | |
6062 | at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly | |
6063 | WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING | |
6064 | is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. | |
6065 | ||
6066 | If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean | |
6067 | place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one | |
6068 | character extends across that column), then the padding character | |
6069 | PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result | |
6070 | string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at | |
6071 | column START-COLUMN. | |
6072 | ||
6073 | *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, | |
6074 | the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not | |
6075 | necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the | |
6076 | difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the | |
6077 | changed text, before the change. | |
6078 | ||
6079 | *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character | |
6080 | sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is | |
6081 | one character set for each script, not for each language. | |
6082 | ||
6083 | **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. | |
6084 | ||
6085 | **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. | |
6086 | ||
6087 | **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character | |
6088 | set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) | |
6089 | ||
6090 | **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the | |
6091 | name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values | |
6092 | which identify the character within that character set. | |
6093 | ||
6094 | **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent | |
6095 | byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the | |
6096 | opposite of split-char. | |
6097 | ||
6098 | **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets | |
6099 | of all the characters between BEG and END. | |
6100 | ||
6101 | **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets | |
6102 | of all the characters in a string. | |
6103 | ||
6104 | *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems | |
6105 | and specifying coding systems. | |
6106 | ||
6107 | **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding | |
6108 | system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list | |
6109 | of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. | |
6110 | (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix | |
6111 | and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well | |
6112 | as what to do about code conversion.) | |
6113 | ||
6114 | **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system | |
6115 | name. It returns t if so, nil if not. | |
6116 | ||
6117 | **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
6118 | for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
6119 | except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. | |
6120 | ||
6121 | Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
6122 | which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp | |
6123 | to match against a file name. | |
6124 | ||
6125 | VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
6126 | a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
6127 | decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
6128 | to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
6129 | systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
6130 | specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
6131 | ||
6132 | If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
6133 | or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
6134 | ||
6135 | **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies | |
6136 | the coding system to use for network sockets. | |
6137 | ||
6138 | Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
6139 | which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be | |
6140 | either a port number or a regular expression matching some network | |
6141 | service names. | |
6142 | ||
6143 | VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
6144 | a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
6145 | decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
6146 | to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
6147 | systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
6148 | specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
6149 | ||
6150 | If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
6151 | or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
6152 | ||
6153 | **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
6154 | for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
6155 | except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to | |
6156 | start the subprocess. | |
6157 | ||
6158 | **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding | |
6159 | systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, | |
6160 | when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell | |
6161 | (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output | |
6162 | to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. | |
6163 | ||
6164 | **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the | |
6165 | coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous | |
6166 | subprocess. | |
6167 | ||
6168 | It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, | |
6169 | but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you | |
6170 | start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or | |
6171 | connection permanently or until overridden. | |
6172 | ||
6173 | The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over | |
6174 | file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and | |
6175 | network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a | |
6176 | coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. | |
6177 | It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding | |
6178 | system for one operation at a time. | |
6179 | ||
6180 | **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from | |
6181 | files, subprocesses or network connections. | |
6182 | ||
6183 | **** The function process-coding-system tells you what | |
6184 | coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. | |
6185 | The value is a cons cell, | |
6186 | (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
6187 | where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from | |
6188 | the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding | |
6189 | input to the subprocess. | |
6190 | ||
6191 | **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to | |
6192 | change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. | |
6193 | ||
6194 | ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many | |
6195 | customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, | |
6196 | you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. | |
6197 | ||
6198 | You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option | |
6199 | variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of | |
6200 | information (usually): the "type" which says what values are | |
6201 | legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for | |
6202 | customization. | |
6203 | ||
6204 | Thus, instead of writing | |
6205 | ||
6206 | (defvar foo-blurgoze nil | |
6207 | "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") | |
6208 | ||
6209 | you would now write this: | |
6210 | ||
6211 | (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil | |
6212 | "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." | |
6213 | :type 'boolean | |
6214 | :group foo) | |
6215 | ||
6216 | The type `boolean' means that this variable has only | |
6217 | two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values | |
6218 | describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom | |
6219 | for a description of them. | |
6220 | ||
6221 | The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option | |
6222 | should belong to. You define a new group like this: | |
6223 | ||
6224 | (defgroup ispell nil | |
6225 | "Spell checking using Ispell." | |
6226 | :group 'processes) | |
6227 | ||
6228 | The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root | |
6229 | group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, | |
6230 | but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond | |
6231 | to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come | |
6232 | second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. | |
6233 | ||
6234 | Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple | |
6235 | package should have just one group; a more complex package should | |
6236 | have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a | |
6237 | package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" | |
6238 | first-level subgroups. | |
6239 | ||
6240 | ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. | |
6241 | ||
6242 | This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a | |
6243 | separate manual that accompanies Emacs. | |
6244 | ||
6245 | ** easy-mmode | |
6246 | ||
6247 | The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make | |
6248 | developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code | |
6249 | only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, | |
6250 | predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro | |
6251 | `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also | |
6252 | `easy-mmode-define-keymap'. | |
6253 | ||
6254 | ** Text property changes | |
6255 | ||
6256 | *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a | |
6257 | text property. | |
6258 | ||
6259 | *** The new functions next-char-property-change and | |
6260 | previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a | |
6261 | place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The | |
6262 | functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the | |
6263 | starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. | |
6264 | ||
6265 | If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If | |
6266 | LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part | |
6267 | of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the | |
6268 | position of the beginning or end of the buffer. | |
6269 | ||
6270 | *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property | |
6271 | value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This | |
6272 | is an alternative to using the keymap itself. | |
6273 | ||
6274 | ** Changes in invisibility features | |
6275 | ||
6276 | *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are | |
6277 | hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match | |
6278 | is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay | |
6279 | should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that | |
6280 | would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should | |
6281 | make the overlay visible. | |
6282 | ||
6283 | During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the | |
6284 | invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are | |
6285 | needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary | |
6286 | which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is | |
6287 | the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and | |
6288 | t when it should hide it. | |
6289 | ||
6290 | *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec | |
6291 | ||
6292 | Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the | |
79214ddf FP |
6293 | invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) |
6294 | and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. | |
a933dad1 | 6295 | Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to |
79214ddf | 6296 | manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. |
a933dad1 DL |
6297 | Here is an example of how to do this: |
6298 | ||
6299 | ;; If we want to display an ellipsis: | |
79214ddf | 6300 | (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) |
a933dad1 | 6301 | ;; If you don't want ellipsis: |
79214ddf | 6302 | (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) |
a933dad1 DL |
6303 | |
6304 | ... | |
6305 | (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) | |
6306 | ||
6307 | ... | |
6308 | ;; When done with the overlays: | |
6309 | (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
6310 | ;; Or respectively: | |
6311 | (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
6312 | ||
6313 | ** Changes in syntax parsing. | |
6314 | ||
6315 | *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as | |
6316 | `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now | |
6317 | obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable | |
6318 | `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. | |
6319 | ||
6320 | If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior | |
6321 | is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always | |
6322 | used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. | |
6323 | ||
6324 | When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a | |
6325 | character in the buffer is calculated thus: | |
6326 | ||
6327 | a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character | |
6328 | is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; | |
6329 | ||
6330 | Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid | |
6331 | syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., | |
6332 | a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). | |
6333 | ||
6334 | b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property | |
6335 | is a syntax table, this syntax table is used | |
6336 | (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to | |
6337 | determine the syntax type of the character. | |
6338 | ||
6339 | c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table | |
6340 | of the current buffer. | |
6341 | ||
6342 | *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the | |
6343 | value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as | |
6344 | for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. | |
6345 | ||
6346 | *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 | |
6347 | and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended | |
6348 | only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A | |
6349 | character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by | |
6350 | another character with the same code (unless quoted). | |
6351 | ||
6352 | These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' | |
6353 | text property. | |
6354 | ||
6355 | *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth | |
6356 | arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start | |
6357 | of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. | |
6358 | ||
6359 | *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' | |
6360 | (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth | |
6361 | element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; | |
6362 | nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the | |
6363 | string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. | |
6364 | ||
6365 | *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete | |
6366 | syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports | |
6367 | `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. | |
6368 | ||
6369 | ** Changes in face features | |
6370 | ||
6371 | *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even | |
6372 | if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. | |
6373 | ||
6374 | *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string | |
6375 | of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). | |
6376 | ||
6377 | *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. | |
6378 | set-face-bold-p sets that flag. | |
6379 | ||
6380 | *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. | |
6381 | set-face-italic-p sets that flag. | |
6382 | ||
6383 | *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text | |
6384 | by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) | |
6385 | and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in | |
6386 | the `face' property (either the character's text property or an | |
6387 | overlay property). | |
6388 | ||
6389 | This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use | |
6390 | arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. | |
6391 | ||
6392 | ** Changes in file-handling functions | |
6393 | ||
6394 | *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant | |
6395 | directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, | |
6396 | they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion | |
6397 | is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. | |
6398 | ||
6399 | This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name | |
6400 | begins with ~. | |
6401 | ||
6402 | *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, | |
6403 | it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. | |
6404 | ||
6405 | *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
6406 | the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. | |
6407 | ||
6408 | *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, | |
6409 | as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. | |
6410 | ||
6411 | *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses | |
6412 | character code conversion as well as other things. | |
6413 | ||
6414 | Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names | |
6415 | (formerly it did not). | |
6416 | ||
6417 | *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR | |
6418 | environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. | |
6419 | ||
6420 | *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps | |
6421 | instead of constant strings. | |
6422 | ||
6423 | *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used | |
6424 | to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of | |
6425 | any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. | |
6426 | ||
6427 | substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, | |
6428 | in the same way as before. | |
6429 | ||
6430 | *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. | |
6431 | The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings | |
6432 | which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. | |
6433 | ||
6434 | *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an | |
6435 | error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing | |
6436 | else, and returns nil. | |
6437 | ||
6438 | *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified | |
6439 | directory cannot be listed. | |
6440 | ||
6441 | ** Changes in minibuffer input | |
6442 | ||
6443 | *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string | |
6444 | read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an | |
6445 | additional argument which specifies the default value. If this | |
6446 | argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two | |
6447 | ways: | |
6448 | ||
6449 | It is returned if the user enters empty input. | |
6450 | It is available through the history command M-n. | |
6451 | ||
6452 | *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, | |
6453 | read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional | |
6454 | argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the | |
6455 | minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of | |
6456 | enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. | |
6457 | ||
6458 | In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an | |
6459 | argument in this way. | |
6460 | ||
6461 | *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties | |
6462 | from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable | |
6463 | minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. | |
6464 | ||
6465 | ** Echo area features | |
6466 | ||
6467 | *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook | |
6468 | echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the | |
6469 | minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active | |
6470 | after the echo area is cleared. | |
6471 | ||
6472 | *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed | |
6473 | in the echo area, or nil if there is none. | |
6474 | ||
6475 | ** Keyboard input features | |
6476 | ||
6477 | *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was | |
6478 | set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. | |
6479 | ||
6480 | *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events | |
6481 | received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated | |
6482 | by keyboard macros. | |
6483 | ||
6484 | ** Frame-related changes | |
6485 | ||
6486 | *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before | |
6487 | creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal | |
6488 | hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. | |
6489 | ||
6490 | *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time | |
6491 | the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration | |
6492 | has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. | |
6493 | ||
6494 | *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
6495 | selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the | |
6496 | value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed | |
6497 | in the selected frame. | |
6498 | ||
6499 | *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars | |
6500 | is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies | |
6501 | which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. | |
6502 | ||
6503 | ** X Windows features | |
6504 | ||
6505 | *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding | |
6506 | x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of | |
6507 | x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. | |
6508 | ||
6509 | *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. | |
6510 | The menu displays the current status of the box or button. | |
6511 | ||
6512 | *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument | |
6513 | MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. | |
6514 | A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. | |
6515 | ||
6516 | If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, | |
6517 | it is good to supply 1 for this argument. | |
6518 | ||
6519 | ** Subprocess features | |
6520 | ||
6521 | *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter | |
6522 | functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this | |
6523 | automatically. | |
6524 | ||
6525 | *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command | |
6526 | and returns the output from the command as a string. | |
6527 | ||
6528 | *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, | |
6529 | and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. | |
6530 | ||
6531 | ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook | |
6532 | does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. | |
6533 | ||
6534 | ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes | |
6535 | at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it | |
6536 | goes after the other menu items. | |
6537 | ||
6538 | ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area | |
79214ddf | 6539 | of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls |
a933dad1 DL |
6540 | around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks |
6541 | are in use. | |
6542 | ||
6543 | The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a | |
6544 | series of several changes--if that seems safe. | |
6545 | ||
6546 | Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and | |
6547 | after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls | |
6548 | form. | |
6549 | ||
6550 | ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION | |
6551 | is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, | |
6552 | but its hook is still run. | |
6553 | ||
6554 | ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) | |
6555 | for errors that are handled by condition-case. | |
6556 | ||
6557 | If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called | |
6558 | regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is | |
6559 | useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. | |
6560 | ||
6561 | This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that | |
6562 | are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process | |
6563 | filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't | |
6564 | warned. | |
6565 | ||
6566 | ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own | |
6567 | way for Emacs to "ring the bell". | |
6568 | ||
6569 | ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at | |
6570 | integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for | |
6571 | functions like display-time. | |
6572 | ||
6573 | ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file | |
6574 | name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. | |
6575 | ||
6576 | ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that | |
6577 | can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode | |
6578 | is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. | |
6579 | ||
6580 | ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code | |
6581 | if there is an error in compilation. | |
6582 | ||
6583 | ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and | |
6584 | switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional | |
6585 | argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, | |
6586 | they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. | |
6587 | ||
6588 | ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, | |
6589 | Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing | |
6590 | the *scratch* buffer. | |
6591 | ||
6592 | ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. | |
6593 | The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used | |
6594 | where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, | |
6595 | e.g., in Font Lock mode. | |
6596 | ||
6597 | ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, | |
6598 | and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. | |
6599 | It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. | |
6600 | ||
6601 | ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message | |
6602 | using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the | |
6603 | variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window | |
6604 | and compose-mail-other-frame. | |
6605 | ||
6606 | ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which | |
6607 | can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The | |
6608 | full name of the specified user will be returned. | |
6609 | ||
6610 | ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort | |
6611 | of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding | |
6612 | where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found | |
6613 | in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q | |
6614 | option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization | |
6615 | files at all. | |
6616 | ||
6617 | ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width | |
6618 | and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field | |
6619 | width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start | |
6620 | the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. | |
6621 | ||
6622 | For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the | |
6623 | minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad | |
6624 | with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that | |
6625 | is how %S normally pads to two positions. | |
6626 | ||
6627 | ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. | |
6628 | ||
6629 | ** imenu.el changes. | |
6630 | ||
6631 | You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an | |
79214ddf | 6632 | item from menu created by imenu. |
a933dad1 DL |
6633 | |
6634 | An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the | |
6635 | #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we | |
6636 | select one of those items. | |
6637 | \f | |
6638 | * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. | |
6639 | \f | |
6640 | * Changes in Emacs 19.33. | |
6641 | ||
6642 | ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major | |
6643 | mode should do that--it is the user's choice.) | |
6644 | ||
6645 | ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to | |
6646 | use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on. | |
6647 | Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works. | |
6648 | \f | |
6649 | * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32 | |
6650 | ||
6651 | ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error. | |
6652 | To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f. | |
6653 | ||
6654 | ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
6655 | conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it | |
6656 | matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the | |
6657 | expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional | |
6658 | word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is | |
6659 | all caps. | |
6660 | ||
6661 | ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame | |
6662 | at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame. | |
6663 | ||
6664 | When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2 | |
6665 | does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same | |
6666 | as in previous Emacs versions. | |
6667 | ||
6668 | ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a | |
6669 | non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any | |
6670 | time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple | |
6671 | frames. | |
6672 | ||
6673 | ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value | |
6674 | if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu. | |
6675 | This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the | |
6676 | Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by | |
6677 | accident. | |
6678 | ||
6679 | ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined | |
6680 | keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region. | |
6681 | It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that | |
6682 | line and then executing the macro. | |
6683 | ||
6684 | This command is not new, but was never documented before. | |
6685 | ||
6686 | ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant | |
6687 | (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter | |
6688 | characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting | |
6689 | characters. | |
6690 | ||
6691 | ** Font Lock mode | |
6692 | ||
6693 | *** Font Lock support modes | |
6694 | ||
6695 | Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see | |
6696 | below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the | |
6697 | hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode | |
6698 | to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when | |
6699 | Font Lock mode is enabled. | |
6700 | ||
6701 | For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put: | |
6702 | ||
6703 | (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode) | |
6704 | ||
6705 | in your ~/.emacs. | |
6706 | ||
6707 | *** lazy-lock | |
6708 | ||
6709 | The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur | |
6710 | only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer | |
6711 | becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and | |
6712 | Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events | |
6713 | occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the | |
6714 | buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until | |
6715 | Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time. | |
6716 | ||
6717 | To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs: | |
6718 | ||
6719 | (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode) | |
6720 | ||
6721 | To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'. | |
6722 | ||
6723 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
6724 | ||
6725 | *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or | |
6726 | paren and key. | |
6727 | ||
6728 | *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now | |
6729 | supported. | |
6730 | ||
6731 | ** Gnus changes. | |
6732 | ||
6733 | Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new | |
6734 | commands and variables have been added. There should be no | |
6735 | significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the | |
6736 | previously released version, except in the message composition area. | |
6737 | ||
6738 | Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes | |
6739 | between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive. | |
6740 | ||
79214ddf | 6741 | *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization |
a933dad1 DL |
6742 | variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now |
6743 | obsolete. | |
6744 | ||
6745 | *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where | |
6746 | missing articles are represented by empty nodes. | |
6747 | ||
6748 | (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some) | |
6749 | ||
6750 | *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server. | |
6751 | ||
6752 | To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil) | |
6753 | ||
6754 | *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are | |
79214ddf | 6755 | referred. |
a933dad1 DL |
6756 | |
6757 | *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions: | |
6758 | ||
6759 | (setq gnus-use-grouplens t) | |
6760 | ||
6761 | *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed. | |
6762 | ||
6763 | (setq gnus-use-trees t) | |
6764 | ||
6765 | *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary | |
79214ddf | 6766 | buffers. |
a933dad1 DL |
6767 | |
6768 | (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode) | |
6769 | ||
6770 | *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode: | |
6771 | ||
6772 | `M-x gnus-binary-mode' | |
6773 | ||
6774 | *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy. | |
6775 | ||
6776 | (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode) | |
6777 | ||
6778 | *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail. | |
6779 | ||
6780 | Use the `S D r' and `S D b'. | |
6781 | ||
6782 | *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency | |
6783 | is possible. | |
6784 | ||
6785 | (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group) | |
6786 | ||
6787 | *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on | |
6788 | groups of groups. | |
6789 | ||
6790 | *** Caching is possible in virtual groups. | |
6791 | ||
6792 | *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news | |
79214ddf | 6793 | batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else. |
a933dad1 DL |
6794 | |
6795 | *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets. | |
6796 | ||
6797 | *** The Gnus cache is much faster. | |
6798 | ||
6799 | *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria. | |
6800 | ||
6801 | For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank) | |
6802 | ||
6803 | *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and | |
6804 | expiration times. | |
6805 | ||
6806 | *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used. | |
6807 | ||
6808 | *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on | |
6809 | process marked articles on the `M P' submap. | |
6810 | ||
6811 | *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available | |
6812 | articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been | |
6813 | bound to keys on the `/' submap. | |
6814 | ||
6815 | *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving | |
6816 | articles with the `*' command. | |
6817 | ||
6818 | *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles. | |
6819 | ||
6820 | *** Article headers can be buttonized. | |
6821 | ||
6822 | (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head) | |
6823 | ||
6824 | *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID. | |
6825 | ||
79214ddf | 6826 | *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the |
a933dad1 DL |
6827 | `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable. |
6828 | ||
6829 | *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article | |
79214ddf | 6830 | buffer. |
a933dad1 DL |
6831 | |
6832 | *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'. | |
6833 | ||
6834 | *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process. | |
6835 | ||
6836 | *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam. | |
6837 | ||
6838 | (setq gnus-use-nocem t) | |
6839 | ||
79214ddf | 6840 | *** Groups can be made permanently visible. |
a933dad1 DL |
6841 | |
6842 | (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:") | |
6843 | ||
79214ddf | 6844 | *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier. |
a933dad1 DL |
6845 | |
6846 | *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header. | |
6847 | ||
79214ddf | 6848 | *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header. |
a933dad1 | 6849 | |
79214ddf | 6850 | (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function |
a933dad1 DL |
6851 | 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references) |
6852 | ||
6853 | *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid | |
79214ddf | 6854 | refetching. |
a933dad1 DL |
6855 | |
6856 | (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50) | |
6857 | ||
6858 | *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate | |
6859 | buffer to allow easier treatment. | |
6860 | ||
6861 | *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'. | |
6862 | ||
6863 | *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving. | |
6864 | ||
6865 | (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t) | |
6866 | ||
6867 | *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching | |
79214ddf | 6868 | articles. |
a933dad1 DL |
6869 | |
6870 | (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view) | |
6871 | ||
79214ddf | 6872 | *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text. |
a933dad1 DL |
6873 | |
6874 | *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much | |
6875 | cited text to hide is now customizable. | |
6876 | ||
6877 | (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2) | |
6878 | ||
6879 | *** Boring headers can be hidden. | |
6880 | ||
6881 | (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers) | |
6882 | ||
6883 | *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar. | |
6884 | ||
6885 | *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added. | |
6886 | ||
6887 | The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features | |
6888 | in greater detail. | |
6889 | \f | |
6890 | * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32 | |
6891 | ||
6892 | ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional | |
6893 | second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not | |
6894 | asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already | |
6895 | exists. | |
6896 | ||
6897 | ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors, | |
6898 | as well as lists. | |
6899 | ||
6900 | ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap | |
6901 | of a given keymap. | |
6902 | ||
6903 | ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a | |
6904 | given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a | |
6905 | keymap or nil. | |
6906 | ||
6907 | ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really | |
6908 | an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real" | |
6909 | name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil | |
6910 | menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for | |
6911 | equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the | |
6912 | alias. | |
6913 | \f | |
6914 | * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31 | |
6915 | ||
6916 | ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States. | |
6917 | ||
6918 | Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act. | |
6919 | This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law | |
6920 | was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans | |
6921 | far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any | |
6922 | pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited. | |
6923 | ||
6924 | For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what | |
6925 | you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site | |
6926 | `http://www.vtw.org/'. | |
6927 | ||
6928 | ** A note about C mode indentation customization. | |
6929 | ||
6930 | The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style | |
6931 | do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode. | |
6932 | It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are | |
6933 | much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs | |
6934 | chapter of the manual for details. | |
6935 | ||
6936 | However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old | |
6937 | customization variables take effect. | |
6938 | ||
6939 | ** Marking with the mouse. | |
6940 | ||
6941 | When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains | |
6942 | highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are | |
6943 | using M-x transient-mark-mode. | |
6944 | ||
6945 | ** Improved Windows NT/95 support. | |
6946 | ||
6947 | *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95. | |
6948 | ||
6949 | *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used | |
6950 | to work on NT only and not on 95.) | |
6951 | ||
6952 | *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems | |
6953 | in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as | |
6954 | you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS | |
6955 | application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS | |
6956 | applications, these problems are significant. | |
6957 | ||
6958 | If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is | |
6959 | likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy. | |
6960 | However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess | |
6961 | will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any | |
6962 | other DOS application as a subprocess. | |
6963 | ||
6964 | Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess. | |
6965 | You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess. | |
6966 | ||
6967 | If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate | |
6968 | subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably | |
6969 | have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy. | |
6970 | Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two | |
6971 | separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing | |
6972 | Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes. | |
6973 | ||
6974 | ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode. | |
6975 | ||
6976 | This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in | |
6977 | which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the | |
6978 | minibuffer contains. | |
6979 | ||
6980 | ** `title' frame parameter and resource. | |
6981 | ||
6982 | The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else. | |
6983 | It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources. | |
6984 | It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise | |
6985 | affects just the displayed title of the frame. | |
6986 | ||
6987 | The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do: | |
6988 | it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources, | |
6989 | and also serves as the default for the displayed title | |
6990 | when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil. | |
6991 | ||
6992 | ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new | |
6993 | enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer). | |
6994 | ||
6995 | ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the | |
6996 | F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual | |
6997 | Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif. | |
6998 | ||
6999 | If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif | |
7000 | menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add | |
7001 | something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds | |
7002 | the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12: | |
7003 | ||
7004 | Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12 | |
7005 | ||
7006 | ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases | |
7007 | to replace the characters it "deletes". | |
7008 | ||
7009 | ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message. | |
7010 | ||
7011 | ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts | |
7012 | a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it, | |
7013 | select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command. | |
7014 | It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message | |
7015 | immediately after the selected one. | |
7016 | ||
7017 | This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly | |
7018 | made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs. | |
7019 | ||
7020 | ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory. | |
7021 | ||
7022 | Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home | |
7023 | directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover. | |
7024 | If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If | |
7025 | Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x | |
7026 | recover-session. | |
7027 | ||
7028 | You can turn off the writing of these files by setting | |
7029 | auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session | |
7030 | will not work. | |
7031 | ||
7032 | Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on | |
7033 | normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off | |
7034 | this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this | |
7035 | bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so | |
7036 | now that the bug is fixed. | |
7037 | ||
7038 | ** Changes to Version Control (VC) | |
7039 | ||
7040 | There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do | |
7041 | when you visit a link to a file that is under version control. | |
7042 | Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system, | |
7043 | which is dangerous and probably not what you want. | |
7044 | ||
7045 | If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file, | |
7046 | telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default), | |
7047 | VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil, | |
7048 | the link is visited and a warning displayed. | |
7049 | ||
7050 | ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language. | |
7051 | Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which | |
7052 | is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters). | |
7053 | ||
7054 | There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and | |
7055 | Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they | |
7056 | enable only the accent characters needed for particular language. | |
7057 | The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language, | |
7058 | remain normal. | |
7059 | ||
7060 | ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various | |
7061 | header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...). | |
7062 | ||
7063 | Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups | |
7064 | known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header | |
7065 | offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since | |
7066 | Followup-To usually just holds one of those. | |
7067 | ||
7068 | Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list | |
7069 | of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides | |
7070 | a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user | |
7071 | name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the | |
7072 | documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and | |
7073 | `mail-directory-stream'.) | |
7074 | ||
7075 | ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured) | |
7076 | skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named | |
7077 | characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible | |
7078 | with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s. | |
7079 | ||
7080 | Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and | |
7081 | - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be | |
7082 | wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results). | |
7083 | ||
7084 | The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or | |
7085 | less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for | |
7086 | headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit / | |
7087 | Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable. | |
7088 | Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to | |
7089 | fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due | |
7090 | to a limitation in font-lock). | |
7091 | ||
7092 | External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving. | |
7093 | ||
7094 | ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current | |
7095 | buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all | |
7096 | buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in | |
7097 | this example: | |
7098 | ||
7099 | (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook | |
7100 | '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index"))) | |
7101 | ||
7102 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
7103 | ||
7104 | *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores. | |
7105 | ||
7106 | *** Font Lock mode is now supported. | |
7107 | ||
7108 | *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive. | |
7109 | ||
7110 | *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new | |
7111 | entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting | |
7112 | will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or | |
7113 | isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c | |
7114 | (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it. | |
7115 | The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil. | |
7116 | ||
7117 | *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q | |
7118 | does the same job. | |
7119 | ||
7120 | *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author = | |
7121 | "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported. | |
7122 | ||
7123 | *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help | |
7124 | text. | |
7125 | ||
7126 | ** Font Lock mode | |
7127 | ||
7128 | *** Global Font Lock mode | |
7129 | ||
7130 | Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the | |
7131 | new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable | |
7132 | font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically | |
7133 | turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned | |
7134 | on globally where the buffer mode supports it. | |
7135 | ||
7136 | For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put: | |
7137 | ||
7138 | (global-font-lock-mode t) | |
7139 | ||
7140 | in your ~/.emacs. | |
7141 | ||
7142 | *** Local Refontification | |
7143 | ||
7144 | In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only. | |
7145 | However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines, | |
7146 | those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new | |
7147 | command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block). | |
7148 | ||
7149 | In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function. | |
7150 | (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the | |
7151 | current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines | |
7152 | above and below point. | |
7153 | ||
7154 | With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point. | |
7155 | ||
7156 | ** Follow mode | |
7157 | ||
7158 | Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same | |
7159 | buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two | |
7160 | side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if | |
7161 | they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window, | |
7162 | split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x | |
7163 | follow-mode. | |
7164 | ||
7165 | M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled. | |
7166 | ||
7167 | To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the | |
7168 | command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split. | |
7169 | ||
7170 | ** hide-show changes. | |
7171 | ||
7172 | The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed | |
7173 | to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for | |
7174 | normal hooks. | |
7175 | ||
7176 | ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands. | |
7177 | The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q. | |
7178 | ||
7179 | ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are | |
7180 | recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are | |
7181 | those that begin a function, record, or macro. | |
7182 | ||
7183 | ** MSDOS Changes | |
7184 | ||
7185 | *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP. | |
7186 | Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works. | |
7187 | ||
7188 | *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten | |
7189 | and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs. | |
7190 | ||
7191 | *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak. | |
7192 | ||
7193 | *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously | |
7194 | pressing both mouse buttons. | |
7195 | ||
7196 | *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had | |
7197 | restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones | |
79214ddf | 7198 | are: |
a933dad1 DL |
7199 | |
7200 | **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package) | |
7201 | now works. | |
7202 | ||
7203 | **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode). | |
7204 | ||
7205 | **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new | |
7206 | implementation of Emacs timers, see below). | |
7207 | ||
7208 | **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards. | |
7209 | ||
7210 | **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms. | |
7211 | ||
7212 | **** `M-x recover-session' works. | |
7213 | ||
7214 | **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors. | |
7215 | ||
7216 | **** The `TPU-EDT' package works. | |
7217 | \f | |
7218 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31. | |
7219 | ||
7220 | ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95 | |
7221 | tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a | |
7222 | remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in | |
7223 | this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this | |
7224 | behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it. | |
7225 | ||
7226 | ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values. | |
7227 | ||
7228 | The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux', | |
7229 | not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type' | |
7230 | need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also | |
7231 | be different. | |
7232 | ||
7233 | It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather | |
7234 | than `system-type'. | |
7235 | ||
7236 | See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this. | |
7237 | ||
7238 | ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process | |
7239 | now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them. | |
7240 | ||
7241 | ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers | |
7242 | that pointed into or next to the deleted text. | |
7243 | ||
7244 | ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and | |
7245 | no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more | |
7246 | reliably and can be used for shorter time delays. | |
7247 | ||
7248 | The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer | |
7249 | to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks | |
7250 | like this: | |
7251 | ||
7252 | (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
7253 | ||
7254 | SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens. | |
7255 | It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer | |
7256 | becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS. | |
7257 | ||
7258 | REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in | |
7259 | seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0 | |
7260 | means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once. | |
7261 | ||
7262 | *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give | |
7263 | up if too much time passes. | |
7264 | ||
7265 | (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...) | |
7266 | ||
7267 | This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds. | |
7268 | If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value | |
7269 | of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last | |
7270 | form in BODY. | |
7271 | ||
7272 | *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for | |
7273 | a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A | |
7274 | call looks like this: | |
7275 | ||
7276 | (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
7277 | ||
7278 | SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer | |
7279 | runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the | |
7280 | timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments | |
7281 | ARGS. | |
7282 | ||
7283 | Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse | |
7284 | command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse | |
7285 | command. | |
7286 | ||
7287 | REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each | |
7288 | time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer | |
7289 | does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after | |
7290 | each time Emacs becomes idle. | |
7291 | ||
7292 | If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is | |
7293 | idle for SECS seconds. | |
7294 | ||
7295 | *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at | |
7296 | all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your | |
7297 | programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers | |
7298 | instead. | |
7299 | ||
7300 | *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if | |
7301 | there is no answer within a certain time. | |
7302 | ||
7303 | (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE) | |
7304 | ||
7305 | asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers | |
7306 | within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave. | |
7307 | Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE. | |
7308 | ||
7309 | ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven | |
7310 | arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual | |
7311 | meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the | |
7312 | arguments in between are ignored. | |
7313 | ||
7314 | This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as | |
7315 | the list of arguments for `encode-time'. | |
7316 | ||
7317 | ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory | |
7318 | /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to | |
7319 | /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for | |
7320 | site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs | |
7321 | version. | |
7322 | ||
7323 | It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs | |
7324 | version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating | |
7325 | for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that | |
7326 | has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself | |
7327 | and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the | |
7328 | problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve. | |
7329 | ||
7330 | ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or | |
7331 | .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating | |
7332 | systems with limited file name syntax. | |
7333 | ||
7334 | Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function | |
7335 | convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form | |
7336 | for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file | |
7337 | completions.el: | |
7338 | ||
7339 | (defvar save-completions-file-name | |
7340 | (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions") | |
7341 | "*The filename to save completions to.") | |
7342 | ||
7343 | This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that | |
7344 | depends on the operating system, because the definition of | |
7345 | convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On | |
7346 | Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On | |
7347 | MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system. | |
7348 | ||
7349 | ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument | |
7350 | rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the | |
7351 | minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.) | |
7352 | ||
7353 | ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process | |
7354 | marker from its buffer position. | |
7355 | ||
7356 | ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether | |
7357 | Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection. | |
7358 | The default is nil, meaning there are no messages. | |
7359 | ||
7360 | ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors | |
7361 | that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error | |
7362 | condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any | |
7363 | of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions | |
7364 | matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger, | |
7365 | regardless of the value of debug-on-error. | |
7366 | ||
7367 | This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting | |
7368 | errors that happen often during editing. | |
7369 | ||
7370 | ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum | |
7371 | into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case | |
7372 | puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened. | |
7373 | ||
7374 | ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window | |
7375 | now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window. | |
7376 | ||
7377 | ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying | |
7378 | a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer | |
7379 | name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames | |
7380 | to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc., | |
7381 | and not get-buffer-window. | |
7382 | ||
7383 | ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions, | |
7384 | calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer | |
7385 | being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them. | |
7386 | ||
7387 | If you use this feature, you should set the variable | |
7388 | buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a | |
7389 | property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a | |
7390 | non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions | |
7391 | are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil | |
7392 | property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called | |
7393 | over and over for the same text. | |
7394 | ||
7395 | ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el | |
7396 | ||
7397 | *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written | |
7398 | in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command: | |
7399 | ||
7400 | ;; @(#) HEADER: text | |
7401 | ;; $HEADER: text $ | |
7402 | ||
7403 | in addition to the normal | |
7404 | ||
7405 | ;; HEADER: text | |
7406 | ||
7407 | *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify | |
7408 | checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and | |
7409 | lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information. | |
7410 | \f | |
7411 | * For older news, see the file ONEWS. | |
7412 | ||
7413 | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
7414 | Copyright information: | |
7415 | ||
404fa7d6 | 7416 | Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
a933dad1 DL |
7417 | |
7418 | Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies | |
7419 | of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the | |
7420 | copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, | |
7421 | thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. | |
7422 | ||
7423 | Permission is granted to distribute modified versions | |
7424 | of this document, or of portions of it, | |
7425 | under the above conditions, provided also that they | |
7426 | carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. | |
7427 | \f | |
7428 | Local variables: | |
7429 | mode: outline | |
7430 | paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$" | |
7431 | end: |